WO2019222538A1 - Aminopyrimidines and aminopyridines as mertk inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment - Google Patents

Aminopyrimidines and aminopyridines as mertk inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019222538A1
WO2019222538A1 PCT/US2019/032722 US2019032722W WO2019222538A1 WO 2019222538 A1 WO2019222538 A1 WO 2019222538A1 US 2019032722 W US2019032722 W US 2019032722W WO 2019222538 A1 WO2019222538 A1 WO 2019222538A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
alkyl
cancer
substituted
disorder
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2019/032722
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Xiaodong Wang
Jichen ZHAO
Stephen Frye
Original Assignee
The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill filed Critical The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill
Publication of WO2019222538A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019222538A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings

Definitions

  • the presently disclosed subject matter relates generally to aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine containing compounds that inhibit one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity. Additionally disclosed are methods of synthesis and use of the aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine containing compounds as anti-cancer agents, immunostimulatory and immunomodulatory agents, anti platelet agents, anti-infective agents, and as adjunctive agents.
  • MerTK Mer tyrosine kinase
  • Tyro3 tyrosine kinase Tyro3 tyrosine kinase
  • Axl tyrosine kinase activity Axl tyrosine kinase activity.
  • MerTK is a member of a receptor tyrosine kinase (RTK) family known as TAM, which also includes Axl and Tyro3. Each member of the TAM family contains an extracellular domain, a transmembrane domain, and a conserved intracellular kinase domain. The TAM family members undergo ligand-induced homodimerization, followed by catalytic tyrosine kinase activation and intracellular signaling. Cross-phosphorylation has been demonstrated within this RTK family, suggesting heterodimerization can also occur. These RTKs are widely expressed in many epithelial tissues and in cells of the immune, nervous, and reproductive systems. Specifically, MerTK has been found to be expressed in monocytes and in tissues of epithelial and reproductive tissue.
  • RTK receptor tyrosine kinase
  • TAM receptor and ligand overexpression have been shown in a wide range of solid and hematological tumors, and correlate with poor prognosis in a variety of tumor types and their signals and promote survival, chemoresistance, motility and invasion.
  • their role in diminishing the innate immune response makes their inhibition a novel mechanism for reversing the immunosuppressive tumor microenvironment.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may further comprise one or more additional active agents.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of treating a disease or disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase.
  • the disease or disorder is cancer.
  • the disease or disorder is an infection.
  • the disease or disorder is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula I in immunostimmulatory therapy. In other embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula I in immunomodulatory therapy.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to methods of making the compounds of Formula I.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a kit for treating a condition mediated by one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase, comprising: a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a Formula I compound; and b) instructions for use.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula II and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may further comprise one or more additional active agents.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula II in immunostimmulatory therapy. In other embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula II in immunomodulatory therapy.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to methods of making the compounds of Formula II.
  • the subject matter described herein is directed to a kit for treating a condition mediated by one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase, comprising: a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a Formula II compound; and b) instructions for use.
  • compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutical compositions thereof that are inhibitors or modulators of one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity.
  • the compounds of Formula I are selective inhibitors of Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • compounds of Formula II and pharmaceutical compositions thereof that are inhibitors or modulators of one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity.
  • the compounds of Formula II are selective inhibitors of Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • the compounds and compositions disclosed herein are useful in treating diseases and disorders mediated by one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity.
  • MerTK Mer tyrosine kinase
  • Tyro3 tyrosine kinase Tyro3 tyrosine kinase
  • Axl tyrosine kinase activity An example of a method of treating is in the case of a subject who is suffering from cancer.
  • the compounds can be used not only to combat cancer, but can also advantageously be used as
  • immunostimulatory and immunomodulatory agents anti-platelet agents, anti-infective agents, and as adjunctive agents.
  • the term“about,” when referring to a measurable value such as an amount of a compound or agent of the current subject matter, dose, time, temperature, and the like, is meant to encompass variations of ⁇ 20%, ⁇ 10%, ⁇ 5%, ⁇ 1%, ⁇ 0.5%, or even ⁇ 0.1% of the specified amount.
  • the terms“approximately,”“about,” and“substantially” as used herein represent an amount close to the stated amount that still performs a desired function or achieves a desired result. For example, in some embodiments, as the context may dictate, the terms
  • “approximately”,“about”, and“substantially” may refer to an amount that is within less than or equal to 10% of the stated amount.
  • the term“generally” as used herein represents a value, amount, or characteristic that predominantly includes or tends toward a particular value, amount, or characteristic.
  • Ranges can be expressed herein as from“about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, some embodiments includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent“about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms some embodiments. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as“about” that particular value in addition to the value itself. For example, if the value“10” is disclosed, then“about 10” is also disclosed. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.
  • references in the specification and concluding claims to parts by weight of a particular element or component in a composition denotes the weight relationship between the element or component and any other elements or components in the composition or article for which a part by weight is expressed.
  • X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.
  • a weight percent (wt. %) of a component is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included.
  • the terms“optional” or“optionally” mean that the subsequently described event or circumstance can or cannot occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
  • the term“subject” can be a vertebrate, such as a mammal, a fish, a bird, a reptile, or an amphibian.
  • the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non-human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig, or rodent.
  • the term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered.
  • the subject is a mammal.
  • the subject is a human.
  • a patient refers to a subject afflicted with a viral infection.
  • the term“patient” includes human and veterinary subjects.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of one or more viral infections prior to the administering step.
  • the one or more disorders is selected from chikungunya, Venezuelan equine encephalitis, dengue, influenza, and zika.
  • treatment refers to the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • This term includes active treatment, that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder, and also includes causal treatment, that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • this term includes palliative treatment, that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder; preventative treatment, that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder; and supportive treatment, that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • the term covers any treatment of a subject, including a mammal (e.g ., a human), and includes: (i) preventing the disease from occurring in a subject that can be predisposed to the disease but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, i.e., arresting its development; or (iii) relieving the disease, i.e., causing regression of the disease.
  • the subject is a mammal such as a primate, and, in some embodiments, the subject is a human.
  • the term“prevent” or“preventing” refers to precluding, averting, obviating, forestalling, stopping, or hindering something from happening, especially by advance action. It is understood that where reduce, inhibit, or prevent are used herein, unless specifically indicated otherwise, the use of the other two words is also expressly disclosed.
  • the term“diagnosed” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by the compounds, compositions, or methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments of the disclosed methods, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a viral infection prior to the administering step.
  • the phrase “identified to be in need of treatment for a disorder,” or the like, refers to selection of a subject based upon need for treatment of the disorder. It is contemplated that the
  • identification can, in some embodiments, be performed by a person different from the person making the diagnosis. It is also contemplated, in some embodiments, that the administration can be performed by one who subsequently performed the administration.
  • administering and“administration” refer to any method of providing a pharmaceutical preparation to a subject. Such methods are well known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, oral administration, transdermal administration, administration by inhalation, nasal administration, topical administration, intravaginal administration, ophthalmic administration, intraaural administration,
  • intracerebral administration rectal administration, and parenteral administration, including injectable such as intravenous administration, intra-arterial administration, intramuscular administration, and subcutaneous administration.
  • Administration can be continuous or intermittent.
  • a preparation can be administered therapeutically; that is, administered to treat an existing disease or condition.
  • a preparation can be administered prophylactically; that is, administered for prevention of a disease or condition.
  • contacting in a biological context, refers to bringing a disclosed compound and a cell, target receptor, or other biological entity together in such a manner that the compound can affect the activity of the target (e.g ., receptor, cell, etc.), either directly; i.e., by interacting with the target itself, or indirectly; i.e., by interacting with another molecule, co-factor, factor, or protein on which the activity of the target is dependent.
  • the target e.g ., receptor, cell, etc.
  • the term“effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired result or to have an effect on an undesired condition.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired therapeutic result or to have an effect on undesired symptoms, but is generally insufficient to cause adverse side effects.
  • the specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration; the route of administration; the rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • the effective daily dose can be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration.
  • compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose.
  • the dosage can be adjusted by the individual physician in the event of any contraindications. Dosage can vary, and can be administered in one or more dose administrations daily, for one or several days. Guidance can be found in the literature for appropriate dosages for given classes of pharmaceutical products.
  • a preparation can be administered in a“prophylactically effective amount”; that is, an effective amount for prevention of a disease or condition.
  • the daily dosage can be administered as a single dose or in divided doses, or for parenteral administration, as a continuous infusion.
  • a compound of Formula I can be in the form of a“prodrug,” which includes compounds with moieties which can be metabolized in vivo.
  • a compound of Formula II can be in the form of a“prodrug.”
  • the prodrugs are metabolized in vivo by esterases or by other mechanisms to active drugs. Examples of prodrugs and their uses are well known in the art (See, e.g., Berge et al. (1977)
  • prodrugs “Pharmaceutical Salts”, J. Pharm. Sci. 66: 1-19). Preparations of such prodrug derivatives are discussed in various literature sources (examples are: Alexander et al., J. Med. Chem. 1988, 31, 318; Aligas-Martin et al., PCT WO 2000/041531, p. 30).
  • the prodrugs can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form or hydroxyl with a suitable esterifying agent.
  • Hydroxyl groups can be converted into esters via treatment with a carboxylic acid.
  • prodrug moieties include substituted and un substituted, branched or unbranched lower alkyl ester moieties, (e.g., propionoic acid esters), lower alkenyl esters, di-lower alkyl-amino lower-alkyl esters (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl ester), acylamino lower alkyl esters (e.g., acetyloxymethyl ester), acyloxy lower alkyl esters (e.g., pivaloyloxymethyl ester), aryl esters (phenyl ester), aryl-lower alkyl esters (e.g., benzyl ester), substituted (e.g., with methyl, halo, or methoxy substituents) aryl and aryl-lower alkyl esters, amides, lower-alkyl amides, di
  • “Derivatives” of the compounds disclosed herein are pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, deuterated forms, radio-actively labeled forms, isomers, solvates and combinations thereof.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refer to derivatives of the disclosed compounds wherein the parent compound is modified by making acid or base salts thereof.
  • the compounds of this disclosure form acid addition salts with a wide variety of organic and inorganic acids and include the physiologically acceptable salts which are often used in pharmaceutical chemistry. Such salts are also part of this disclosure.
  • Typical inorganic acids used to form such salts include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, nitric, sulfuric, phosphoric, hypophosphoric acid, and the like.
  • Salts derived from organic acids such as aliphatic mono- and dicarboxylic acids, phenyl substituted alkanoic acids, hydroxyalkanoic and hydroxyalkandioic acids, aromatic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfonic acids may also be used.
  • Such pharmaceutically acceptable salts thus include acetate, phenylacetate, trifluoroacetate, acrylate, ascorbate, benzoate, chlorobenzoate, dinitrobenzoate,
  • the term“substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, and aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds.
  • Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described below.
  • the permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.
  • the heteroatoms, such as nitrogen can have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms.
  • substitution or“substituted with” include the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g ., a compound that does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. It is also contemplated that, in certain embodiments, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e., further substituted or un substituted).
  • “A 1 ,”“A 2 ,”“A 3 ,” and“A 4 ” are used herein as generic symbols to represent various specific substituents. These symbols can be any substituent, not limited to those disclosed herein, and when they are defined to be certain substituents in one instance, they can, in another instance, be defined as some other substituents.
  • alkyl as used herein is a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, isopropyl, «-butyl, isobutyl, s- butyl, /-butyl, «-pentyl, isopentyl, 5-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl, and the like.
  • the alkyl group can also be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the alkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
  • A“lower alkyl” group is an alkyl group containing from one to six (e.g., from one to four) carbon atoms.
  • alkyl is generally used to refer to both unsubstituted alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups; however, substituted alkyl groups are also specifically referred to herein by identifying the specific substituent(s) on the alkyl group.
  • halogenated alkyl specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halide, e.g. , fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
  • alkoxyalkyl specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more alkoxy groups, as described below.
  • alkylamino specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more amino groups, as described below, and the like.
  • alkyl is used in one instance and a specific term such as“alkylalcohol” is used in another, it is not meant to imply that the term“alkyl” does not also refer to specific terms such as “alkylalcohol” and the like.
  • cycloalkyl refers to both unsubstituted and substituted cycloalkyl moieties
  • the substituted moieties can, in addition, be specifically identified herein; for example, a particular substituted cycloalkyl can be referred to as, e.g ., an“alkylcycloalkyl.”
  • a substituted alkoxy can be specifically referred to as, e.g. , a“halogenated alkoxy”
  • a particular substituted alkenyl can be, e.g. , an“alkenylalcohol,” and the like.
  • the practice of using a general term, such as“cycloalkyl,” and a specific term, such as“alkylcycloalkyl,” is not meant to imply that the general term does not also include the specific term.
  • cycloalkyl as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring, which may be single or multi -cyclic, composed of at least three carbon atoms.
  • cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, norbomyl, and the like.
  • Cycloalkyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some embodiments, cycloalkyl is C3-C8.
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to single and multi-cyclic non aromatic ring systems in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon.
  • Heterocycloalkyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C2-C9, C2-C8, C2-C7, C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8.
  • heterocycloalkyl is C2-C7.
  • Non-limiting examples of heterocycloalkyl groups include piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, azetidine, tetrahydropyran, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and the like.
  • the cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
  • alkoxy refers to an -O-alkyl or -O-cycloalkyl radical bonded through an ether linkage. Alkoxy groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.
  • haloalkoxy refers to an -O-alkyl group that is substituted by one or more halo substituents. Examples of haloalkoxy groups include trifluoromethoxy, and 2,2,2- trifluoroethoxy.
  • alkenyl as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • the alkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
  • cycloalkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl,
  • Cycloalkenyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some embodiments, cycloalkenyl is C3-C8.
  • Heterocycloalkenyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8.
  • heterocycloalkenyl is C3-C8.
  • the cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
  • alkynyl is a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
  • aryl as used herein is a single or multi-cyclic group that contains any carbon-based aromatic group including, but not limited to, benzene, naphthalene, phenyl, biphenyl, phenoxybenzene, and the like.
  • the term“biaryl” is a specific type of aryl group and is included in the definition of“aryl.” Biaryl refers to two aryl groups that are bound together via a fused ring structure, as in naphthalene, or are attached via one or more carbon- carbon bonds, as in biphenyl.
  • heteroaryl as used herein is a single or multi-cyclic group that contains any aromatic group that has at least one heteroatom incorporated within the ring of the aromatic group.
  • heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and phosphorus.
  • the heteroaryl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C9, C3-C8, C3-C7, C3-C6, C3-C5, C3-C4, C4-C5, C4-C6, C5-C6, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8.
  • heteroaryl is C4-C5.
  • Non-limiting examples of such heteroaryl groups include imidazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, pyridazyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, quinoxolyl, pyranyl, pyrimidinyl, furyl, thienyl, triazolyl, thiazolyl, carbolinyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thiamorpholinyl sulfone, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxopiperidinyl,
  • oxopyrrolidinyl oxoazepinyl, azepinyl
  • isoxazolyl isothiazolyl, furazanyl, thiadiazyl, oxathiolyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, and benzocinnolinyl, and the like.
  • the aryl or heteroaryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the aryl or heteroaryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
  • aldehyde as used herein is represented by the formula— C(0)H.
  • NA 1 A 2 where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, hydrogen or alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • alkylamino as used herein is represented by the formula— NH(-alkyl) where alkyl is a described herein.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, isopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, (sec-butyl)amino group, (tert-butyl)amino group, pentylamino group, isopentylamino group, (tert-pentyl)amino group, hexylamino group, and the like.
  • dialkylamino as used herein is represented by the formula— N(-alkyl) 2 where alkyl is a described herein.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, dibutylamino group, diisobutylamino group, di(sec-butyl)amino group, di(tert-butyl)amino group, dipentylamino group, diisopentylamino group, di(tert-pentyl)amino group, dihexylamino group, N-ethyl-N-methylamino group, N-methyl-N-propylamino group, N- ethyl-N-propylamino group and the like.
  • esters as used herein is represented by the formula— 0C(0)A 1 or— C(0)0A 1 , where A 1 can be an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • polystyrene resin as used herein is represented by the formula— (A 1 0(0)C-A 2 -C(0)0) a— or— (A 1 0(0)C-A 2 - 0C(0)) a— , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer from 1 to 500. “Polyester” is as the term used to describe a group that is produced by the reaction between a compound having at least two carboxylic acid groups with a compound having at least two hydroxyl groups.
  • ether as used herein is represented by the formula A'OA 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein.
  • polyether as used herein is represented by the formula— (A 1 0-A 2 0) a— , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer of from 1 to 500.
  • Examples of polyether groups include polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide, and polybutylene oxide.
  • halide refers to the halogens fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
  • hydroxyl as used herein is represented by the formula— OH.
  • ketone as used herein is represented by the formula A 1 C(0)A 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl,
  • cycloalkenyl alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • nitrile as used herein is represented by the formula— CN.
  • silica as used herein is represented by the formula— SiA 1 A 2 A 3 , where A 1 , A 2 , and A 3 can be, independently, hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • sulfo-oxo as used herein is represented by the formulas— S(0)A',— S(0) 2 A 1 , — 0S(0) 2 A 1 , or— 0S(0) 2 0A 1 , where A 1 can be hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • sulfonyl is used herein to refer to the sulfo-oxo group represented by the formula— S(0)?A', where A 1 can be hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • the term“sulfone” as used herein is represented by the formula A ' S(0)?A 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • the term“sulfoxide” as used herein is represented by the formula A' S(0)A 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • R 1 ,”“R 2 ,”“R 3 ,”“R n ,” where n is an integer, as used herein can, independently, possess one or more of the groups listed above.
  • R 1 is a straight chain alkyl group
  • one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group can optionally be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a halide, and the like.
  • a first group can be incorporated within second group or,
  • the first group can be pendant (i.e., attached) to the second group.
  • the amino group can be incorporated within the backbone of the alkyl group.
  • the amino group can be attached to the backbone of the alkyl group. The nature of the group(s) that is (are) selected will determine if the first group is embedded or attached to the second group.
  • compounds of the subject matter described herein may contain “optionally substituted” moieties.
  • the term“substituted,” whether preceded by the term“optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent.
  • an“optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position.
  • Combinations of substituents envisioned by the subject matter described herein are those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e., further substituted or unsubstituted).
  • stable refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain embodiments, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • Suitable monovalent substituents on R° are independently halogen, - (CH 2 ) O-2 R ⁇ , -(haloR*), -(CH 2 ) 0-2 OH, -(CH 2 )o- 2 OR e , -(CH 2 ) 0-2 CH(OR*) 2 ; -0(haloR*), -CN, -Ns, -(CH 2 ) O-2 C(0)R ⁇ , -(CH 2 ) O-2 C(0)OH, -(CH 2 ) O-2 C(0)OR ⁇ , -(CH 2 )o- 2 SR e , -(CH 2 ) O-2 SH, -(CH 2 ) O-2 NH 2 , -(CH 2 ) O-2 NHR ⁇ , -(CH 2 ) O-2 NR* 2 , -N0 2 , -SiR’s, -OSiR
  • Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an“optionally substituted” group include: -0(CR * 2 ) 2-3 0-, wherein each independent occurrence of R * is selected from hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R * include halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)OH, -C(0)OR*, -NH 2 , NHR*, -NR* 2, or -N0 2 , wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci- 4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -0(CH 2 )o-iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an“optionally substituted” group include -R ⁇ , -NR ⁇ 2 , -C(0)R ⁇ , -C(0)OR ⁇ , -C(0)C(0)R ⁇ , -C(0)CH 2 C(0)R ⁇ , - S(0) 2 R ⁇ , -S(0) 2 NR ⁇ 2 , -C(S)NR ⁇ 2 , -C(NH)NR ⁇ 2 , or -N(R ⁇ )S(0) 2 R ⁇ ; wherein each R ⁇ is independently hydrogen, Ci- 6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted -OPh, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R ⁇ , taken together with their intervening atom(s)
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R ⁇ are independently halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)OH, -C(0)OR*, -NH 2 , NHR*, -NR* 2, or -N0 2 , wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci- 4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -0(CH 2 )o-iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • organic residue defines a carbon containing residue, i.e., a residue comprising at least one carbon atom, and includes but is not limited to the carbon-containing groups, residues, or radicals defined hereinabove.
  • Organic residues can contain various heteroatoms, or be bonded to another molecule through a heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or the like. Examples of organic residues include but are not limited alkyl or substituted alkyls, alkoxy or substituted alkoxy, mono or di- substituted amino, amide groups, etc.
  • Organic residues can preferably comprise 1 to 18 carbon atoms, 1 to 15, carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • an organic residue can comprise 2 to 18 carbon atoms, 2 to 15, carbon atoms, 2 to 12 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms
  • a very close synonym of the term“residue” is the term“radical,” which as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to a fragment, group, or substructure of a molecule described herein, regardless of how the molecule is prepared.
  • a 2,4- thiazolidinedione radical in a particular compound has the structure:
  • radical for example an alkyl
  • substituted alkyl can be further modified (i.e., substituted alkyl) by having bonded thereto one or more“substituent radicals.”
  • the number of atoms in a given radical is not critical to the presently described subject matter unless it is indicated to the contrary elsewhere herein.
  • Organic radicals contain one or more carbon atoms.
  • An organic radical can have, for example, 1-26 carbon atoms, 1-18 carbon atoms, 1- 12 carbon atoms, 1-8 carbon atoms, 1-6 carbon atoms, or 1-4 carbon atoms.
  • an organic radical can have 2-26 carbon atoms, 2-18 carbon atoms, 2-12 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbon atoms, or 2-4 carbon atoms.
  • Organic radicals often have hydrogen bound to at least some of the carbon atoms of the organic radical.
  • One example, of an organic radical that comprises no inorganic atoms is a 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydro-2- naphthyl radical.
  • an organic radical can contain 1-10 inorganic heteroatoms bound thereto or therein, including halogens, oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, and the like.
  • organic radicals include but are not limited to an alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, mono-substituted amino, di- substituted amino, acyloxy, cyano, carboxy, carboalkoxy, alkylcarboxamide, substituted alkylcarboxamide, dialkylcarboxamide, substituted dialkylcarboxamide, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfmyl, thioalkyl, thiohaloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, or substituted heterocyclic radicals, wherein the terms are defined elsewhere herein.
  • organic radicals that
  • Inorganic radicals contain no carbon atoms and therefore comprise only atoms other than carbon.
  • Inorganic radicals comprise bonded combinations of atoms selected from hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, and halogens such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, which can be present individually or bonded together in their chemically stable combinations.
  • Inorganic radicals have 10 or fewer, or preferably one to six or one to four inorganic atoms as listed above bonded together. Examples of inorganic radicals include, but not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halogens, nitro, thiol, sulfate, phosphate, and like commonly known inorganic radicals.
  • the inorganic radicals do not have bonded therein the metallic elements of the periodic table (such as the alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, transition metals, lanthanide metals, or actinide metals), although such metal ions can sometimes serve as a pharmaceutically acceptable cation for anionic inorganic radicals such as a sulfate, phosphate, or like anionic inorganic radical.
  • Inorganic radicals do not comprise metalloids elements such as boron, aluminum, gallium, germanium, arsenic, tin, lead, or tellurium, or the noble gas elements, unless otherwise specifically indicated elsewhere herein.
  • a specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture.
  • a 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture.
  • Many of the compounds described herein can have one or more chiral centers and therefore can exist in different enantiomeric forms. If desired, a chiral carbon can be designated with an asterisk (*). When bonds to the chiral carbon are depicted as straight lines in the disclosed formulas, it is understood that both the (R) and (S) configurations of the chiral carbon, and hence both enantiomers and mixtures thereof, are embraced within the formula.
  • one of the bonds to the chiral carbon can be depicted as a wedge (bonds to atoms above the plane) and the other can be depicted as a series or wedge of short parallel lines is (bonds to atoms below the plane).
  • the Cahn-Inglod-Prelog system can be used to assign the (R) or (S) configuration to a chiral carbon.
  • a disclosed compound includes both enantiomers and mixtures of enantiomers, such as the specific 50:50 mixture referred to as a racemic mixture.
  • the enantiomers can be resolved by methods known to those skilled in the art, such as formation of diastereoisomeric salts which may be separated, for example, by crystallization (see, CRC Handbook of Optical Resolutions via
  • Diastereomeric Salt Formation by David Kozma (CRC Press, 2001)); formation of diastereoisomeric derivatives or complexes which may be separated, for example, by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography; selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specific reagent, for example enzymatic esterification; or gas-liquid or liquid chromatography in a chiral environment, for example on a chiral support for example silica with a bound chiral ligand or in the presence of a chiral solvent.
  • a further step can liberate the desired enantiomeric form.
  • specific enantiomers can be synthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer into the other by asymmetric transformation.
  • Designation of a specific absolute configuration at a chiral carbon in a disclosed compound is understood to mean that the designated enantiomeric form of the compounds can be provided in enantiomeric excess (e.e.).
  • Enantiomeric excess is the presence of a particular enantiomer at greater than 50%, for example, greater than 60%, greater than 70%, greater than 75%, greater than 80%, greater than 85%, greater than 90%, greater than 95%, greater than 98%, or greater than 99%.
  • the designated enantiomer is substantially free from the other enantiomer.
  • the“R” forms of the compounds can be substantially free from the“S” forms of the compounds and are, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the“S” forms.
  • “S” forms of the compounds can be substantially free of“R” forms of the compounds and are, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the“R” forms.
  • a disclosed compound When a disclosed compound has two or more chiral carbons, it can have more than two optical isomers and can exist in diastereoisomeric forms. For example, when there are two chiral carbons, the compound can have up to four optical isomers and two pairs of enantiomers ((S,S)/(R,R) and (R,S)/(S,R)).
  • the pairs of enantiomers e.g., (S,S)/(R,R)
  • the stereoisomers that are not mirror-images e.g., (S,S) and (R,S) are diastereomers.
  • diastereoisomeric pairs can be separated by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example chromatography or crystallization and the individual enantiomers within each pair may be separated as described above. Unless otherwise specifically excluded, a disclosed compound includes each diastereoisomer of such compounds and mixtures thereof.
  • a compound may have two chiral carbons on a cycloalkyl ring, such as a cyclohexyl ring.
  • the substituents on the chiral carbons may be labeled as in the“cis” or“trans” configuration.
  • the substituents on the cyclohexyl may, in some embodiments, labeled as such:
  • Compounds described herein comprise atoms in both their natural isotopic abundance and in non-natural abundance.
  • the disclosed compounds can be isotopically-labeled or isotopically-substituted compounds identical to those described, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number typically found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the subject matter described herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 ⁇ 4, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 0, 17 0, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl, respectively.
  • Compounds further comprise prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of said compounds or of said prodrugs which contain the aforementioned isotopes and/or other isotopes of other atoms are within the scope of the subject matter described herein.
  • Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of the presently described subject matter for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3 H and 14 C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated, i.e., 3 ⁇ 4, and carbon-l4, i.e., 14 C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability.
  • isotopically labeled compounds of the presently described subject matter and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non- isotopically labeled reagent.
  • A“solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of Formula I.
  • a“solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of Formula I.
  • solvents that form solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine.
  • solvents that form solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine.
  • the term“hydrate” refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water. Unless stated to the contrary, the subject matter described herein includes all such possible solvates.
  • polymorphic forms or modifications It is known that chemical substances form solids which are present in different states of order which are termed polymorphic forms or modifications.
  • the different modifications of a polymorphic substance can differ greatly in their physical properties.
  • the compounds according to the subject matter described herein can be present in different polymorphic forms, with it being possible for particular modifications to be metastable. Unless stated to the contrary, the subject matter described herein includes all such possible polymorphic forms.
  • Certain materials, compounds, compositions, and components disclosed herein can be obtained commercially or readily synthesized using techniques generally known to those of skill in the art.
  • the starting materials and reagents used in preparing the disclosed compounds and compositions are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wis.), Acros Organics (Morris Plains, N.J.), Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.), or Sigma (St.
  • Formula I is a compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, metabolites, or derivatives thereof. These compounds are useful inhibitors of one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase.
  • Formula I has the following general structure:
  • Cy 1 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl and C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
  • R la is selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy 2 , and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4)
  • R la is selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy 2 , and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and Cy 2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
  • Cy 2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl,
  • C1-C8 alkyl selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy 2 , and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy 2 , and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein
  • R lb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy 2 , and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy 2 , and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
  • Cy a is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, -C(0)R 20 , -C(0)N(R 22 )R 2 °, -N(R 22 )C(0)R 2 °, - S0 2 N(R 22 )R 21 , -N(R 22 )S0 2 R 21 , -S0 2 R 21 , and -(CH 2 ) n Cy 3 ; wherein
  • n is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
  • R 20 and R 21 is each independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) q OR 30 , and -(CH 2 ) q Cy 4 ; wherein
  • q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
  • R 30 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • Cy 4 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
  • R 20 is as defined above;
  • R 40a and R 40b is each independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • R 22 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • Cy 3 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, , -C(0)R 2 °, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein
  • R 20 is as defined above;
  • R 3 is selected from -(CH 2 ) p OH and -(CH 2 ) P NHR 23 ;
  • p is selected from 0, 1, and 2;
  • R 23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • R 3 is selected from -(CH 2 ) p OH, -(CH 2 ) P NHR 23 , and -NR 23 R 24 ;
  • p is selected from 0, 1, and 2;
  • R 23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • R 24 is -(CH 2 ) q Cy 5 ;
  • q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
  • Cy 5 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, - NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
  • X is -NR 50 - or -(CH 2 ) t NR 50 -;
  • t is selected from 1 and 2;
  • R 50 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • a compound wherein Cy 1 is optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl.
  • a compound wherein the optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted piperidine.
  • R lb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl and Cy 2 .
  • R lb is C1-C8 alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
  • R lb is C3-C5 alkyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
  • a compound wherein the aryl is optionally substituted phenyl.
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of-C(0)R 20 , -(CH 2 ) n Cy 3 , and -SO2R 21 .
  • a compound wherein n is 1 and Cy 3 is C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
  • p is selected from 0, 1, and 2.
  • R lb and R 2 are defined as herein.
  • a compound wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
  • a compound wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
  • a compound wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the compounds disclosed herein are compounds of Formula II or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, metabolites, or derivatives thereof. These compounds are useful inhibitors of one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase.
  • Formula II has the following general structure:
  • Cy 1 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl and C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
  • R la is selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy 2 , and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
  • Cy 2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl,
  • R lb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy 2 , and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy 2 , and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and ; wherein
  • Cy a is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, -C(0)R 20 , -C(0)N(R 22 )R 2 °, -N(R 22 )C(0)R 2 °, - S0 2 N(R 22 )R 21 , -N(R 22 )S0 2 R 21 , -S0 2 R 21 , and -(CH 2 ) n Cy 3 ; wherein
  • n is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
  • R 20 and R 21 is each independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) q OR 30 , and - (CH 2 ) q Cy 4 ; wherein
  • q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
  • R 30 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • Cy 4 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and
  • R 40a and R 40b is each independently selected from hydrogen and Cl-
  • R 22 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • Cy 3 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, , -C(0)R 20 , C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein R 20 is as defined above;
  • R 3 is selected from -(CH 2 ) p OH, -(CH 2 ) P NHR 23 , and -NR 23 R 24 ; wherein
  • p is selected from 0, 1, and 2;
  • R 23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • R 24 is -(CH 2 ) q Cy 5 ;
  • q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
  • Cy 5 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; and
  • X is -NR 50 - or -(CH 2 ) t NR 50 -;
  • t is selected from 1 and 2;
  • R 50 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl
  • a compound wherein said optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted piperidine.
  • a compound wherein said aryl is optionally substituted phenyl.
  • a compound wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with halogen.
  • a compound wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is:
  • a compound wherein R 2 is hydrogen or C1-C4 alkyl.
  • p is selected from 0, 1, and 2.
  • R lb and R 2 are defined as herein.
  • the subject matter described herein relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In other embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of Formula II and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutical composition can be provided comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one disclosed compound. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutical composition can be provided comprising a prophylactically effective amount of at least one disclosed compound. In some embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound, wherein the compound is present in an effective amount.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds are conventional acid-addition salts or base-addition salts that retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the compounds and are formed from suitable non-toxic organic or inorganic acids or organic or inorganic bases.
  • Exemplary acid-addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid, phosphoric acid and nitric acid, and those derived from organic acids such as p- toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, malic acid, lactic acid, fumaric acid, and the like.
  • Example base-addition salts include those derived from ammonium, potassium, sodium and, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, such as for example, tetram ethyl ammonium hydroxide.
  • Chemical modification of a pharmaceutical compound into a salt is a known technique to obtain improved physical and chemical stability, hygroscopicity, flowability and solubility of compounds. See, e.g., H. Ansel et. ak, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems (6th Ed. 1995) at pp. 196 and 1456-1457.
  • compositions comprise the compounds in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier refers to sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use.
  • suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol and the like), carboxymethylcellulose and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • the compounds can be formulated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or diluents as well as any other known adjuvants and excipients in accordance with conventional techniques such as those disclosed in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, l9th Edition, Gennaro, Ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1995.
  • the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions comprise the disclosed compounds (including pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and, optionally, other therapeutic ingredients or adjuvants.
  • the instant compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous)
  • compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, rectal, and vaginal administration are merely exemplary and are in no way limiting.
  • Formulations suitable for oral administration can consist of (a) liquid solutions, such as an effective amount of the compound dissolved in diluents, such as water, saline, or orange juice; (b) capsules, sachets, tablets, lozenges, and troches, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, as solids or granule; (c) powders; (d) suspensions in an appropriate liquid; and (e) suitable emulsions.
  • Liquid formulations may include diluents, such as water, cyclodextrin, dimethyl sulfoxide and alcohols, for example, ethanol, benzyl alcohol, propylene glycol, glycerin, and the polyethylene alcohols including polyethylene glycol, either with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, suspending agent, or emulsifying agent.
  • diluents such as water, cyclodextrin, dimethyl sulfoxide and alcohols, for example, ethanol, benzyl alcohol, propylene glycol, glycerin, and the polyethylene alcohols including polyethylene glycol, either with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, suspending agent, or emulsifying agent.
  • Capsule forms can be of the ordinary hard-or soft-shelled gelatin type containing, for example, surfactants, lubricants, and inert fillers, such as lactose, sucrose, calcium phosphat
  • Tablet forms can include one or more of the following: lactose, sucrose, mannitol, corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid, microcrystalline cellulose, acacia, gelatin, guar gum, colloidal silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, talc, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, stearic acid, and other excipients, colorants, diluents, buffering agents, disintegrating agents, moistening agents, preservatives, flavoring agents, and pharmacologically compatible carriers.
  • Lozenge forms can comprise the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth, as well as pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acadia, emulsions, and gels containing, the addition to the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acadia, emulsions, and gels containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art.
  • an inert base such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acadia, emulsions, and gels containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be made into aerosol formulations to be administered via inhalation.
  • aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, and nitrogen. They also may be formulated as
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous, isotonic sterile injection solutions, which can contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives.
  • the compound can be administered in a physiologically acceptable diluent in a pharmaceutical carrier, such as a sterile liquid or mixture of liquids, including water, saline, aqueous dextrose and related sugar solutions, an alcohol, such as ethanol, isopropanol, or hexadecyl alcohol, glycols, such as propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol such as poly(ethyleneglycol) 400, glycerol ketals, such as 2,2- dimethyl- 1, 3-dioxolane-4-methanol, ethers, an oil, a fatty acid, a fatty acid ester or glyceride, or an acetylated fatty acid glyceride with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, such as a soap or a detergent, suspending agent, such as pectin, carbomers, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, or carboxymethylcelluslose, or emulsifying agents and other pharmaceutical adju
  • Oils which can be used in parenteral formulations include petroleum, animal, vegetable, or synthetic oils. Specific examples of oils include peanut, soybean, sesame, cottonseed, com, olive, petrolatum, and mineral. Suitable fatty acids for use in parenteral formulations include oleic acid, stearic acid, and isostearic acid. Ethyl oleate and isopropyl myristate are examples of suitable fatty acid esters.
  • Suitable soaps for use in parenteral formulations include fatty alkali metal, ammonium, and triethanolamine salts
  • suitable detergents include (a) cationic detergents such as, for example dimethyldialkylammonium halides, and alkylpyridinium halides, (b) anionic detergents such as, for example, alkyl, aryl, and olefin sulfonates, alkyl olefin, ether, and monoglyceride sulfates, and sulfosuccinates, (c) nonionic detergents such as, for example, fatty amine oxides, fatty acid alkanolamides, and polyoxyethylene polypropylene copolymers, (d) amphoteric detergents such as, for example, alkyl b-aminopropionates, and 2-alkylimidazoline quaternary ammonium salts, and (e) mixtures thereof.
  • the parenteral formulations typically contain from about 0.5% to about 25% by weight of the active ingredient in solution. Suitable preservatives and buffers can be used in such formulations. In order to minimize or eliminate irritation at the site of injection, such compositions may contain one or more nonionic surfactants having a hydrophile-lipophile balance (HLB) of from about 12 to about 17. The quantity of surfactant in such formulations ranges from about 5% to about 15% by weight. Suitable surfactants include polyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as sorbitan monooleate and the high molecular weight adducts of ethylene oxide with a hydrophobic base, formed by the condensation of propylene oxide with propylene glycol.
  • HLB hydrophile-lipophile balance
  • compositions of the present disclosure are also well-known to those who are skilled in the art. The choice of excipient will be determined in part by the particular compound, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of the pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure. The following methods and excipients are merely exemplary and are in no way limiting.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable excipients preferably do not interfere with the action of the active ingredients and do not cause adverse side-effects.
  • Suitable carriers and excipients include solvents such as water, alcohol, and propylene glycol, solid absorbants and diluents, surface active agents, suspending agent, tableting binders, lubricants, flavors, and coloring agents.
  • the formulations can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid excipient, for example, water, for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • sterile liquid excipient for example, water
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets.
  • the requirements for effective pharmaceutical carriers for injectable compositions are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. See Pharmaceutics and Pharmacy Practice , J.B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia, PA, Banker and Chalmers, Eds., 238-250 (1982) and ASHP Handbook on Injectable Drugs , Toissel, 4 th ed., 622-630 (1986).
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier; as well as creams, emulsions, and gels containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art.
  • formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as suppositories by mixing with a variety of bases such as emulsifying bases or water-soluble bases.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, or spray formulas containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • administering a compound of the present disclosure to an animal are available, and, although more than one route can be used to administer a particular compound, a particular route can provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.
  • the present methods include the administration to an animal, particularly a mammal, and more particularly a human, of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound effective in the inhibition of one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase.
  • the compound of Formula I administered to an animal is a Mer tyrosine kinase selective inhibitor.
  • the methods also include the administration of a therapeutically effect amount of the compound for the treatment of patient having a predisposition for being afflicted by a disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction, or an infectious disease.
  • the patient is afflicted by a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • the dose administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the presently described subject matter should be sufficient to affect a therapeutic response in the animal over a reasonable time frame.
  • dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the condition of the animal, the body weight of the animal, as well as the severity and stage of the disorder or infectious disease.
  • the total amount of the compound of the present disclosure administered in a typical treatment is preferably between about 10 mg/kg and about 1000 mg/kg of body weight for mice, and between about 100 mg/kg and about 500 mg/kg of body weight, and more preferably between 200 mg/kg and about 400 mg/kg of body weight for humans per daily dose.
  • This total amount is typically, but not necessarily, administered as a series of smaller doses over a period of about one time per day to about three times per day for about 24 months, and preferably over a period of twice per day for about 12 months.
  • a method is provided to treat a host by administering a daily amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the present invention, which may be provided in dosages once or more a day.
  • the Mer TKI dose is between about .5 mg and about 200 mg.
  • the dose is at least about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5mg, about 10 mg, about 12 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 110 mg, about 125 mg, about 140 mg, about 150, about 175, or about 200 mg. In another embodiment, the dose is between about 200 mg and 1250 mg.
  • the dose is about 200 mg, about 225 mg, about 250 mg, about 275 mg, about 300 mg, about 325 mg, about 350 mg, about 375 mg, about 400 mg, about 425 mg, about 450 mg, about 475 mg, about 500 mg, about 525 mg, about 550 mg, about 575 mg, about 600 mg, about 625 mg, about 650 mg, about 675 mg, about 700 mg, about 725 mg, about 750 mg, about 775 mg, about 800 mg, about 825 mg, about 850 mg, about 875 mg, about 900 mg, about 925 mg, about 950 mg, about 975 mg, about 1000 mg or more.
  • the compounds described herein are combined with an additional anti-tumor agent, anti -neoplastic agent, anti -cancer agent, immunomodulatory agent, immunostimulatory agent, anti-infective agents, anti -thrombotic, and/or anti-clotting agent.
  • the dosage administered to the host can be similar to that as administered during monotherapy treatment, or may be lower, for example, between about 0.5 mg and about 150 mg.
  • the dose is at least about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5mg, about 10 mg, about 12 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 110 mg, about 125 mg, about 140 mg, or about 150 mg.
  • the amount of the compound of Formula I to be administered ranges from about 0.01 mg/kg of the patient to about 50 mg/kg or more of the patient or considerably more, depending upon the second compound to be co- administered, the condition of the patient, severity of the disease to be treated, and the route of administration.
  • the additional anti-tumor agent, anti -neoplastic agent, anti-cancer agent, immunomodulatory agent, immunostimulatory agent, anti -infective agents, anti -thrombotic, and/or anti -clotting agent may, for example, be administered in amounts ranging from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg.
  • suitable daily dosages are, for example, between about 0.1-4000 mg administered orally once-daily, twice-daily, or three times-daily, continuous (every day) or intermittently (e.g., 3- 5 days a week).
  • the size of the dose also will be determined by the route, timing and frequency of administration as well as the existence, nature and extent of any adverse side effects that might accompany the administration of the compound and the desired physiological effect. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that various conditions or disease states, in particular chronic conditions or disease states, may require prolonged treatment involving multiple administrations.
  • the composition further comprises at least one or more of an agent known to treat a viral infection, a bacterial infection, a thrombotic disorder or a clotting disorder, or a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation.
  • an agent known to treat a viral infection, a bacterial infection, a thrombotic disorder or a clotting disorder, or a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation The agents are described in detail herein.
  • the disclosed compounds can, for example, be prepared by the methods described herein.
  • a practitioner skilled in the art will understand the appropriate use of protecting groups [see: Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis ] and the preparation of known compounds found in the literature using the standard methods of organic synthesis. There may come from time to time the need to rearrange the order of the recommended synthetic steps, however this will be apparent to the judgment of a chemist skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • the following examples are provided so that the subject matter described herein might be more fully understood, are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limiting.
  • the disclosed compounds comprise the products of the synthetic methods described herein.
  • the disclosed compounds comprise a compound produced by a synthetic method described herein.
  • the subject matter described herein comprises a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of the product of the disclosed methods and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the subject matter described herein comprises a method for manufacturing a medicament comprising combining at least one compound of any of disclosed compounds or at least one product of the disclosed methods with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the subject matter described herein are useful in treating or controlling a variety of disorders including, but not limited to, disorders of uncontrolled cellular proliferation such as, for example, cancer, infections such as, for example, a viral infection and a bacterial infection, and thrombotic disorders.
  • ligand-bound MerTK can complex with phosphatidyl serine and bind apoptotic cells, which triggers ingestion and suppression of inflammatory cytokines. It is aberrantly expressed in certain cancers (e.g., acute leukemia (ALL and AML)) and some solid tumors (e.g., breast cancer, colon cancer, non-small cell lung carcinoma, glioblastoma, and others).
  • ALL and AML acute leukemia
  • solid tumors e.g., breast cancer, colon cancer, non-small cell lung carcinoma, glioblastoma, and others.
  • the MerTK ligands include growth arrest-specific 6 protein (GAS6; Chen, et al; Oncogene (1997) 14, 2033-2039), protein-S, tubby and tubby-like protein- 1 (TULP1), and galectin-3.
  • GAS6 growth arrest-specific 6 protein
  • TULP1 tubby and tubby-like protein- 1
  • galectin-3 Several of these ligands are present in serum and expressed locally in a number of tissues. These ligands bind to the extracellular domain of MerTK, resulting in tyrosine kinase activation.
  • MerTK is ectopically expressed or overexpressed in a number of hematologic and epithelial malignant cells.
  • Expression of MerTK and GAS6 correlates with poor prognosis and/or chemoresistance in these tumor types.
  • MerTK -/- knock-out mice are less susceptible to tumor growth than normal mice (Cook et al. (2013) J Clin. Invest. 123: 3231-3242).
  • MerTK is normally expressed in myeloid lineage cells where it acts to suppress pro-inflammatory cytokines following ingestion of apoptotic material. It was found that MerTK -/- leukocytes exhibit lower tumor cell-induced expression of wound healing cytokines (IL-10 and GAS6) and enhanced expression of acute inflammatory cytokines (IL-12 and IL-6). Further, intratumoral CD8+ lymphocytes are increased. The loss of MerTK in the tumor
  • TAM receptor tyrosine kinases have been investigated for their involvement in certain infectious diseases. For example, Shimojima et al. reported the involvement of members of the Tyro3 receptor tyrosine kinase family, Axl, Dkt and MerTK, in the cell entry of filoviruses Ebola virus and Marburg virus, and concluded that each Tyro3 family member is likely a cell entry factor in the infection (Shimokima et al. (2006) Journal of Virology p. 10109- 10116). Additional diseases for which TAM receptor tyrosine kinases have been studied include, but are not limited to, microbial infections (U.S.
  • TAM (Tyro3-Axl-Mer) receptor tyrosine kinases have also been investigated for their involvement in platelet aggregation.
  • MerTK presumably through activation by its ligand Gas6, participates in the regulation of platelet function in vitro and platelet-dependent thrombosis in vivo (Chen et al. (2004 ) Arterioscler. Thrombosis Vase. Biol. 1118-1123). Chen reported that PtdSer on aggregating platelets activates MerTK, helping to stabilize clot formation.
  • MerTK knockout mice have decreased platelet
  • mice appear to be protected from thrombosis without concomitant increased spontaneous bleeding. See also, Angelillo-Scherrer et al. (2005) J. Clin. Invest. 115(2): 237-246).
  • MERTK and Axl dual inhibitors the normal roles of MERTK and AXL in preventing or terminating innate immune-mediated inflammation and natural killer (NK) cell responses are subverted in the tumor microenvironment. MERTK and AXL decrease NK cell antitumor activity, which paradoxically allows increased metastases.
  • AXL chemoresistance. Therefore, targeting AXL allowed for increased potency of small molecule MerTK inhibitors, both on its ability to decrease the activation of MERTK and downstream effectors, as well its ability to decrease proliferation and colony formation.
  • the cooperative relationship between MERTK and AXL, and coordinated regulation of expression has been demonstrated. Specifically, inhibition of either receptor increases expression of the other receptor. Additionally, MERTK and AXL are capable of physical interaction, suggesting that heterodimerization between MERTK and AXL may be a relevant mechanism of dual receptor activation. Targeting these two receptors concurrently provided synergistic decreases in oncogenic signaling, cell proliferation and colony formation.
  • Dual inhibition of MERTK and AXL may be a rational combination strategy that may have clinical utility against NSCLC and other solid tumors.
  • the compounds disclosed herein are useful for treating or controlling disorders of uncontrolled cellular proliferation, infections, and/or thrombotic or clotting disorders.
  • methods comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a composition comprising a disclosed compound to a subject.
  • the compounds disclosed herein are also useful as immunomodulatory or
  • methods for the treatment of a disorder associated with one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I.
  • the method is treatment of a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • methods for the treatment of a disorder associated with one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II.
  • the method is treatment of a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • a method wherein the disorder is a cancer, an infection, a fibrosis, a thrombotic disorder, a clotting disorder, or a disorder associated with an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
  • a method wherein the disorder is a cancer.
  • a method wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of breast cancer, cervical cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, colorectal cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer, pancreatic cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, glioma, leukemia, lymphoma, chronic myeloproliferative disorder, myelodysplastic syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasm, and plasma cell neoplasm (myeloma).
  • a method wherein the tumor or cancer is MerTK +/+.
  • a method wherein the tumor or cancer is MerTK -/-.
  • a method wherein the dsorder is an infection.
  • a method wherein the infection is viral.
  • a method wherein the infection is bacterial.
  • a method wherein the disorder is a fibrosis.
  • the fibrosis is a liver fibrosis.
  • a method further comprising administering an additional active agent.
  • a method for inhibiting one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I.
  • the method is a method for inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I.
  • a method for inhibiting one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II.
  • the method is a method for inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II.
  • the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatement of a disorder related to Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • a disclosed compound or composition is capable of direct anti cancer effects by inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase within tumor cells.
  • the cancer treated overexpresses MerTK.
  • the cancer which is a disclosed compound or composition is capable of direct anti cancer effects by inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase within tumor cells.
  • the cancer treated overexpresses MerTK.
  • the cancer which is a disclosed compound or composition is capable of direct anti cancer effects by inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase within tumor cells.
  • the cancer treated overexpresses MerTK.
  • MerTK is selected from the group consisting of acute myeloid leukemia, T-cell acute lymphoid leukemia, B-cell acute lymphoid leukemia, lung cancer, glioma, melanoma, prostate cancer, schwannoma, mantle cell lymphoma, and rhabdomyosarcoma.
  • the cancer ectopically expresses MerTK.
  • the cancer treated has a mutation in the amino acid sequence of the MerTK extracellular or transmembrane domain selected from P40S (melanoma),
  • the cancer treated has a mutation in the amino acid sequence of the MerTK cytosolic domain mutation selected from L586F (urinary tract), G594R (breast), S626C (urinary tract), P672S (lung), L688M (colon), A708S (head and neck), N718Y (lung), R722stop (colon), M790V (lung), P802S (melanoma), V873I Giver), S905F (lung), K923R (melanoma), P958L (kidney), D983N (liver), and D990N (colon).
  • a disclosed compound or composition is administered to a host with a cancer in combination with one or more additional chemotherapeutic agents, resulting in a synergistic anti-cancer effect and the prolonged survival of a host compared to treatment with either a compound described herein or chemotherapeutic agent alone.
  • the use of a Mer TKI compound described herein in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent provides for increased antitumor effects without an increase in the standard of care dosage of the chemotherapeutic agent.
  • the use of a Mer TKI compound described herein in combination with a chemotherapeutic provides for equivalent or increased anti-tumor effects utilizing a lower dosage of a chemotherapeutic agent than the standard of care dosage.
  • a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating a non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC).
  • a method is provided to treat a host with non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC) comprising
  • a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with another tyrosine kinase inhibitor.
  • the tyrosine kinase inhibitor is a fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibitor.
  • the FGFR inhibitor is AZD-4547.
  • the cancer is non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC).
  • a method is provided to treat a host with non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC) comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with an additional tyrosine kinase inhibitor, wherein the additional tyrosine kinase inhibitor is selected from the group consisting of gefitinib and crizotinib.
  • NSCLC non-small cell lung carcinoma
  • a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating a melanoma.
  • the administration of the Mer TKI compound described herein is combined with a chemotherapeutic agent.
  • the chemotherapeutic agent is an anti-programmed cell death -1 (PD-l) agent.
  • the chemotherapeutic agent is a B-RAF inhibitor.
  • the B-RAF inhibitor is vemurafenib.
  • the host does not have a melanoma with a B-RAF mutation.
  • the host has a melanoma with a B-RAF mutation.
  • the host has a melanoma with a RAS mutation.
  • the melanoma over-expresses MerT.
  • the melanoma has metastasized.
  • a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL).
  • a method is provided to, treat a host with ALL comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition in combination with methotrexate.
  • a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML).
  • AML contains a wild type FLT3 protein.
  • the replication of the AML cells are dependent on FLT3 expression.
  • the AML contains a FLT3-ITD mutation.
  • the AML contains a FLT3-TKD mutation.
  • the AML contains both a FLT3-ITD and FLT3-TKD mutation.
  • a FLT3 or dual MER/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is administered to a host suffering from AML, wherein the AML contains a mutation within the FLT3-TKD at amino acid F691 or D835.
  • a tumor survival-signal inhibiting amount for example 0.5 to 150 mg dose
  • a tumor survival-signal inhibiting amount for example 0.5 to 150 mg dose
  • a tumor survival-signal inhibiting amount for example, at least 150 mg/dose, and in some embodiments, at least 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, or 500 mg/dosage or more
  • a tumor survival-signal inhibiting amount for example, at least 150 mg/dose, and in some embodiments, at least 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, or 500 mg/dosage or more
  • the Mer TKI and the chemotherapeutic agent act synergistically.
  • the use of a Mer TKI in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent provides for increased anti-tumor effects without an increase in the standard of care dosage of the chemotherapeutic agent.
  • the use of a Mer TKI including compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with a chemotherapeutic provides for equivalent or increased antitumor effects utilizing a lower dosage of a chemotherapeutic agent than the standard of care dosage.
  • the Mer TKI including compounds of the presently described subject matter can be administered to a host with a cancer prior to, during, or after administration with a chemotherapeutic agent or exposure to ionizing radiation.
  • a host is administered an effective amount of a chemotherapeutic agent or ionizing radiation and subsequently administered a Mer TKI.
  • a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition in combination with an immunomodulatory agent.
  • the host an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition in combination with an immunomodulatory agent.
  • immunomodulatory agent is selected from the group consisting of a CTLA-4 inhibitor, PD-l or anti -PD-l ligand, IFN-alpha, IFN-beta, and a vaccine, for example, a cancer vaccine.
  • a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising
  • a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising
  • a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with Yervoy® (ipilimumab).
  • a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with an immunomodulatory agent selected from the group consisting of pembrolizumab and ipilimumab, wherein the cancer is melanoma.
  • the Mer TK is useful in the presently described subject matter, including active compounds of the presently described subject matter, are dual MER/Tyro3 TKIs.
  • the Mer TKIs are dual Mer/Axl TKIs.
  • the Mer TKIs are dual Mer/Tyro3 TKIs.
  • the Mer TKIs are MER-specific TKIs.
  • the Mer TKIs are Tyro3 -specific TKIs.
  • the cancer treated can be a primary tumor or a metastatic tumor.
  • the methods described herein are used to treat a solid tumor, for example, melanoma, lung cancer (including lung adenocarcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, large cell carcinoma, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, bronchiogenic carcinoma, non-small-cell carcinoma, small cell carcinoma, mesothelioma); breast cancer (including ductal carcinoma, lobular carcinoma, inflammatory breast cancer, clear cell carcinoma, mucinous carcinoma, serosal cavities breast carcinoma); colorectal cancer (colon cancer, rectal cancer, colorectal adenocarcinoma); anal cancer; pancreatic cancer (including pancreatic adenocarcinoma, islet cell carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors); prostate cancer; prostate adenocarcinoma; ovarian carcinoma (ovarian epithelial carcinoma
  • oropharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma salivary gland adenoid cystic carcinoma; bladder cancer; gastric cancer; bladder carcinoma; carcinoma of the uterus (including endometrial adenocarcinoma, ocular, uterine papillary serous carcinoma, uterine clear-cell carcinoma, uterine sarcomas and leiomyosarcomas, mixed mullerian tumors); glioma, glioblastoma, medulloblastotna, and other tumors of the brain; kidney cancers (including renal cell carcinoma, clear cell carcinoma, Wilm's tumor); cancer of the head and neck (including squamous cell carcinomas); cancer of the stomach (gastric cancers, stomach adenocarcinoma, gastrointestinal stromal tumor); testicular cancer; germ cell tumor; neuroendocrine tumor; cervical cancer; carcinoids of the gastrointestinal tract, breast, and other organs; signet ring cell carcinoma; mesenchymal tumors including s
  • myofibroblastoma myofibroblastoma, fibromatosis, inflammatory myofibroblastic rumor, lipoma, angiolipoma, granular cell tumor, neurofibroma, schwannoma, angiosarcoma, liposarcoma,
  • rhabdomyosarcoma osteosarcoma, leiomyoma, leiomysarcoma, skin, including melanoma, cervical, retinoblastoma, head and neck cancer, pancreatic, brain, thyroid, testicular, renal, bladder, soft tissue, adenal gland, urethra, cancers of the penis, myxosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteosarcoma, chordoma, malignant fibrous histiocytoma,
  • lymphangiosarcoma mesothelioma, squamous cell carcinoma; epidermoid carcinoma, malignant skin adnexal tumors, adenocarcinoma, hepatoma, hepatocellular carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hypernephroma, cholangiocarcinoma, transitional cell carcinoma,
  • choriocarcinoma seminoma, embryonal cell carcinoma, glioma anaplastic; glioblastoma multiforme,, neuroblastoma, medulloblastoma, malignant meningioma, malignant schwannoma, neurofibrosarcoma, parathyroid carcinoma, medullary carcinoma of thyroid, bronchial carcinoid, pheochromocytoma, Islet cell carcinoma, malignant carcinoid, malignant paraganglioma, melanoma, Merkel cell neoplasm, cystosarcoma phylloide, salivary cancers, thymic carcinomas, and cancers of the vagina among others.
  • a method is provided to treat a host with a glioblastoma comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with temozolomide. In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with a breast cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with trastuzumab.
  • the cancer is NSCLC. In some embodiments, the cancer is a melanoma. In some embodiments, the cancer is breast cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a glioblastoma. In some embodiments, the cancer is a bone cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a brain cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a colon cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a rectal cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is an endometrial cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is an esophageal cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a cancer of the gastrointestinal tract. In some embodiments, the cancer is a kidney cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a liver cancer.
  • the cancer is a lung cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a mantle cell lymphoma. In some embodiments, the cancer is an ovarian cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a pancreatic cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a pituitary cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a prostate cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a skeletal muscle cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a skin cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a stomach cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a thyroid cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a neuroendocrine cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a gastroesophageal cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a renal cell cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a head and neck cancer.
  • the methods described herein are useful for treating a host suffering from a lymphoma or lymphocytic or myelocytic proliferation disorder or abnormality.
  • the Mer TKIs as described herein can be administered to a subject suffering from a Hodgkin Lymphoma of a Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma.
  • the subject can be suffering from a Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma such as, but not limited to: an AIDS-Related Lymphoma; Anaplastic Large-Cell Lymphoma; Angioimmunoblastic Lymphoma; Blastic NK-Cell Lymphoma; Burkitf s Lymphoma; Burkitt-like Lymphoma (Small Non-Cleaved Cell Lymphoma); Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia/Small Lymphocytic Lymphoma; Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma; Diffuse Large B-Cell Lymphoma; Enteropathy- Type T-Cell Lymphoma; Follicular Lymphoma; Hepatosplenic Gamma-Delta T-Cell Lymphoma; Lymphoblastic Lymphoma; Mantle Cell Lymphoma; Marginal Zone
  • Lymphoma Nasal T-Cell Lymphoma; Pediatric Lymphoma; Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas; Primary Central Nervous System Lymphoma; T-Cell Leukemias; Transformed Lymphomas; Treatment-Related T-Cell Lymphomas; or Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia.
  • the subject may be suffering from a Hodgkin Lymphoma, such as, but not limited to: Nodular Sclerosis Classical Hodgkin's Lymphoma (CHL); Mixed Cellularity CHL; Lymphocyte-depletion CHL; Lymphocyte-rich CHL; Lymphocyte Predominant Hodgkin Lymphoma; or Nodular Lymphocyte Predominant HL.
  • CHL Nodular Sclerosis Classical Hodgkin's Lymphoma
  • Mixed Cellularity CHL Lymphocyte-depletion CHL
  • Lymphocyte-rich CHL Lymphocyte Predominant Hodgkin Lymphoma
  • Lymphocyte Predominant Hodgkin Lymphoma or Nodular Lymphocyte Predominant HL.
  • the methods as described herein may be useful to treat a host suffering from a specific T-cell, a B-cell, or a NK-cell based lymphoma, proliferative disorder, or abnormality.
  • the subject can be suffering from a specific T-cell or NK-cell lymphoma, for example, but not limited to: Peripheral T-cell lymphoma, for example, peripheral T-cell lymphoma and peripheral T-cell lymphoma not otherwise specified (PTCL-NOS); anaplastic large cell lymphoma, for example anaplastic lymphoma kinase (ALK) positive, ALK negative anaplastic large cell lymphoma, or primary cutaneous anaplastic large cell lymphoma; angioimmunoblastic lymphoma; cutaneous T-cell lymphoma, for example mycosis fungoides, S zary syndrome, primary cutaneous anaplastic large cell lymphoma, primary cutaneous CD30+ T-cell lymphoprolife
  • ALK an
  • Enteropathy-associated T-cell lymphoma Hepatosplenic T-cell lymphoma; or Subcutaneous panniculitis-like T-cell lymphoma.
  • the subject may be suffering from a specific B-cell lymphoma or proliferative disorder such as, but not limited to: multiple myeloma; Diffuse large B cell lymphoma; Follicular lymphoma; Mucosa-Associated Lymphatic Tissue lymphoma
  • MALT Small cell lymphocytic lymphoma
  • MCL Mantle cell lymphoma
  • Burkitt lymphoma Mediastinal large B cell lymphoma
  • Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia Nodal marginal zone B cell lymphoma (NMZL); Splenic marginal zone lymphoma (SMZL);
  • Intravascular large B-cell lymphoma Intravascular large B-cell lymphoma; Primary effusion lymphoma; or Lymphomatoid granulomatosis; Chronic ' lymphocytic leukemia/small lymphocytic lymphoma; B-cell prolymphocyte leukemia; Hairy cell leukemia Splenic lymphoma/leukemia, unclassifiable; Splenic diffuse red pulp small B-cell lymphoma; Hairy cell leukemia-variant;
  • Lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma Heavy chain diseases, for example, Alpha heavy chain disease, Gamma heavy chain disease, Mu heavy chain disease; Plasma cell myeloma; Solitary plas acyto a of bone; Extraosseous plasmacytoma; Primary cutaneous follicle center lymphoma; T cell/histiocyte rich large B-cell lymphoma; DLBCL associated with chronic inflammation; Epstein-Barr virus (EBV)+ DLBCL of - the elderly; Primary mediastinal (thymic) large B-cell lymphoma; Primary cutaneous DLBCL, leg type; ALK+ large B-cell lymphoma; Plasmablastic lymphoma; Large B-cell lymphoma arising in HHV8 -associated multicentric; Castleman disease; B-cell lymphoma, unclassifiable, with features intermediate between diffuse large B-cell lymphoma and Burkitt lymphoma; B-cell lymphoma, unclassifiable, with features intermediate between diffuse large B-cell
  • the methods described herein can be used to a subject suffering from a leukemia.
  • the subject may be suffering from an acute or chronic leukemia of a lymphocytic or myelogenous origin, such as, but not limited to: Acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL); Acute myelogenous leukemia (A L); Chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL); Chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML); juvenile myelomonocytic leukemia (JMML); hairy cell leukemia (HCL); acute promyelocytic leukemia (a subtype of AML); T- cell prolymphocyte leukemia (TPLL); large granular lymphocytic leukemia; or Adult T-cell chronic leukemia; large granular lymphocytic leukemia (LGL).
  • ALL Acute lymphoblastic leukemia
  • a L Acute myelogenous leukemia
  • CLL Chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • CML Chronic
  • myeloblastic leukemia M2; with cell maturation
  • promyelocytic leukemia M3 or M3 variant [M3 V]
  • myelomonocytic leukemia M4 or M4 variant with eosinophilia [M4E]
  • onocytic leukemia M5); ervthroleukemia (M6); or megakaryoblastic leukemia (M7).
  • the methods described herein can be used to treat a host suffering from Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML).
  • AML contains a wild type FLT3 protein.
  • the replication of the AML cells are dependent on FLT3 expression.
  • the AML contains a FLT3-ITD mutation.
  • the AML contains a FLT3-T D mutation.
  • the AML contains both a FLT3-ITD and FLT3-TKD mutation.
  • FLT3-ITD mutations are well known in the art.
  • FLT3-TKD mutations are also well known in the art.
  • a FLT3 or dual MER/FLT3 inhibitor is administered to a host suffering from AML, wherein the AML contains a mutation within the FLT3-TKD at amino acid F691 or D835.
  • the FLT3-TKD mutation is selected from D835H, D835N, D835Y, D835A, D835V, D835V, D835E, I836F, I836L, I836V, I836D, I836H, I836M, and F691L.
  • the host is suffering from the FLT3-TKD mutation D835Y.
  • the host is suffering from the FLT3-TKD mutation F691L.
  • the host is suffering from acute promyelocytic leukemia (a subtype of AML); a minimally differentiated AML (MO); myeloblastic leukemia (Ml;
  • acute promyelocytic leukemia a subtype of AML
  • MO minimally differentiated AML
  • Ml myeloblastic leukemia
  • the host is suffering from AML that has relapsed or become refractory to previous treatments. In some embodiments, the host has previously been treated with a FLT3 inhibitor or other chemotherapeutic agent.
  • the FLT3 inhibitors are efficacious against AML having both FLT3-ITD and FLT3-TKD mutations, wherein resistance to other FLT3 inhibitors, for example, AC220, has been established.
  • the host has an Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML) comprising a FLT3 mutation, wherein the mutation confers resistance to a FLT3 inhibitor other than the FLT3 inhibitors described herein.
  • AML Acute Myeloid Leukemia
  • the host has an AML comprising a FLT3 mutation, wherein the mutation has conferred resistance to quizartinib (AC220) or other FLT3 inhibitor selected from lestaurtinib, sunitinib, sorafenib, tandutinib, midostaurin, amuvatinib crenolanib, dovitinib, ENMD-2076 (EntreMed), or KW-2449 (Kyowa Hakko Kirin), or a combination thereof.
  • AML Acute Myeloid Leukemia
  • an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination or alternation with a chemotherapeutic agent.
  • agents may include, but are not limited to, tamoxifen, midazolam, letrozole, bortezomib, anastrozole, goserelin, an mTOR inhibitor, a PI3 kinase inhibitors, dual mTOR-PBK inhibitors, MEK inhibitors, RAS inhibitors, ALK inhibitors, HSP inhibitors (for example, HSP70 and HSP 90 inhibitors, or a combination thereof).
  • mTOR inhibitors include but are not limited to rapamycin and its analogs, everolimus (Afmitor), temsirolimus, ridaforolimus, sirolimus, and
  • P13 kinase inhibitors include but are not limited to Wortmannin, demethoxyviridin, perifosine, idelalisib, PX-866, IPI-145, BAY 80-6946, BEZ235, RP6503, TGR 1202 (RP5264), MLN1117 (GNK1117), Pictilisib, Buparlisib, SAR245408 (XL147), SAR245409 (XL765), Palomid 529, ZSTK474, PWT33597, RP6530, CUDC-907, and AEZS-136.
  • Examples of MEK inhibitors include but are not limited to Trametinib,
  • the chemotherapeutic agent is an anti -programmed cell death -1 (PD-l) agent, for example, nivolumab, pembrolizumab, BMS936559,
  • the chemotherapeutic agent is a B-RAF inhibitor, for example, vemurafenib or sorafenib.
  • the chemotherapeutic agent is a FGFR inhibitor, for example, but not limited to, AZD4547, dovitinib, BGJ398, LY2874455, and ponatinib.
  • an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination with crizotinib.
  • the additional therapeutic agent is an anti-inflammatory agent, a chemotherapeutic agent, a radiotherapeutic, an additional therapeutic agent, or an immunosuppressive agent.
  • Suitable chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, radioactive molecules, toxins, also referred to as cytotoxins or cytotoxic agents, which includes any agent that is detrimental to the viability of cells, agents, and liposomes or other vesicles containing chemotherapeutic compounds.
  • General anticancer pharmaceutical agents include: Vincristine (Oncovin®) or liposomal vincristine (Marqibo®), Daunorubicin (daunomycin or
  • Cerubidine® or doxorubicin (Adriamycin®), Cytarabine (cytosine arabinoside, ara-C, or Cytosar®), L-asparaginase (El spar®) or PEG-L-asparaginase (pegaspargase or Oncaspar®), Etoposide (VP- 16), Teniposide (Vumon®), 6-mercaptopurine (6-MP or Purinethol®), Methotrexate, Cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan®), Prednisone, Dexamethasone (Decadron), imatinib (Gleevec®), dasatinib (Sprycel®), nilotinib (Tasigna®), bosutinib (Bosulif®), and ponatinib (IclusigTM).
  • chemotherapeutic agents include but are not limited to 1 -dehydrotestosterone, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine, 6-mercaptopurine, 6- thioguanine, actinomycin D, adriamycin, aldesleukin, alkylating agents, allopurinol sodium, altretamine, amifostine, anastrozole, anthramycin (AMC)), anti-mitotic agents, cis- dichlorodiamine platinum (GG) (DDP) cisplatin), diamino-dichloro-platinum, anthracyclines, antibiotics, antimetabolites, asparaginase, BCG live (intravesical), betamethasone sodium phosphate and betamethasone acetate, bicalutamide, bleomycin sulfate, busulfan, calcium leucovorin, calicheamicin, capecitabine, carboplatin, lomustine (CCNU), carmustine
  • BSMJ Chlorambucil
  • Cisplatin Cisplatin
  • Cladribine Cisplatin
  • Colchicine conjugated estrogens
  • Cyclophosphamide Cyclophosphamide, Cyclophosphamide, Cytarabine, Cytarabine, cytochalasin B, Cytoxan, dacarbazine, Dactinomycin, dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), Daunorubicin HC1, Daunorubicin citrate, denileukin diftitox, Dexrazoxane, Dibromomannitol, dihydroxy anthracin dione, Docetaxel, dolasetron mesylate, doxorubicin HC1, dronabinol, E.
  • octreotide acetate oligomycin A, ondansetron HC1, paclitaxel, pamidronate disodium, pentostatin, pilocarpine HC1, plimycin, polifeprosan 20 with carmustine implant, porfimer sodium, procaine, procarbazine HC1, propranolol, rituximab, sargramostim, streptozotocin, tamoxifen, taxol, teniposide, tenoposide, testolactone, tetracaine, thioepa chlorambucil, tMoguanine, thiotepa, topotecan HC1, toremifene citrate, trastuzumab, tretinoin, valrubicin, vinblastine
  • Additional therapeutic agents that can be administered in combination with a compound disclosed herein can include bevacizumab, sutinib, sorafenib, 2-methoxyestradiol or 2ME2, fmasunate, vatalanib, vandetanib, aflibercept, volociximab, etaracizumab (MEDI- 522), cilengitide, erlotinib, cetuximab, panitumumab, gefitinib, trastuzumab, dovitinib, figitumumab, atacicept, rituximab, alemtuzumab, aldesleukine, atlizumab, tocilizumab, temsirolimus, everolimus, lucatumumab, dacetuzumab, HLL1, huN90l-DMl, atiprimod, natalizumab, bortezomib, carfilzomi
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent for the treatment of AML.
  • chemotherapeutic agents may include, but are not limited to, cytarabine (ara-C), anthracycline drugs including but not limited to, daunorubicin, idarubicin; cladribine, fludarabine, Gleevec® (imatinib), Sprycel® (dasatinib), adriamycin, arsenic trioxide, cerubidine, clafen, cyclophosphamide, cytarabine, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, vincristine, and topotecan.
  • cytarabine ara-C
  • anthracycline drugs including but not limited to, daunorubicin, idarubicin; cladribine, fludarabine, Gleevec® (imatin
  • chemo drugs that may be used to treat AML include: etoposide (VP- 16), 6-thioguanine (6-TG), hydroxyurea (Hydrea®), Corticosteroid drugs, such as prednisone or dexamethasone (Decadron®), methotrexate (MTX), 6-mercaptopurine (6-MP), azacitidine (Vidaza®), and decitabine (Dacogen®).
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with cytarabine.
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with an additional FLT3 inhibitor to treat with a host suffering from AML.
  • Additional FLT3 inhibitors for use in combination with the FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitors described herein include lestaurtinib, sunitinib, sorafenib, tandutinib, midostaurin, crenolanib, dovitinib, ENMD-2076 (Entremed), amuvatinib, or KW- 2449 (Kyowa Hakko Kirin).
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a Ras inhibitor.
  • Ras inhibitors include but are not limited to Reolysin, FusOn-H2, and siG 12D LODER.
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a Phosphoinositide 3 -kinase inhibitor (PI3K inhibitor).
  • PI3K inhibitors that may be used in the presently described subject matter are well known.
  • PI3K inhibitors include but are not limited to Wortmannin, demethoxyviridin, perifosine, idelalisib, Pictilisib, Palomid 529, ZSTK474, PWT33597, CUDC-907, AEZS-136, PX-866, IPI-145, RP6503, SAR245408 (XL147), duvelisib, GS-9820, GDC-0032 (2-[4-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5- methyl-l,2,4- triazol-3-yl)-5,6-dmydroimidazo[l,2-d][l,4]benzoxazepin-9-yl]pyrazol-l-yl]-2- methylpropanamide), MLN-1 1 17 ((2R)-l-Phenoxy-2-butanyl hydrogen (S)- methylphosphonate; or Methyl(oxo) ⁇ [(2R)-l-l
  • KTN-193 ((R)-2-((l-(7-methyl-2-morpholino-4-oxo-4H- pyrido[l,2- a]pyrimidin-9-yl)ethyI)amino)benzoic acid), TGR-1202/RP5264, GS-9820 ((S)- 1- (4-((2-(2- aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-7-methyl-4-mohydroxypropan- 1 -one), GS-1101 (5-fluoro- 3-phenyl-
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a modulator of the STAT5 pathway.
  • Compounds which modulate the Janus Kinase 2 (JAK2) - Signal Transducer and Activator of Transcription 5 (STAT5) pathway include but are not limited to Lestaurtinib, Ruxolitinib, SB1518, CYT387, LY3009104, INC424, LY2784544, BMS-91 1543, NS-018, and TG101348.
  • a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with an AKT inhibitor, including but not limited to, MK-2206, GSK690693, Perifosine, (KRX-0401), GDC-0068, Triciribine, AZD5363, Honokiol, PF-04691502, and Miltefosine.
  • AKT inhibitor including but not limited to, MK-2206, GSK690693, Perifosine, (KRX-0401), GDC-0068, Triciribine, AZD5363, Honokiol, PF-04691502, and Miltefosine.
  • Active compounds as described herein used in a dosage for direct effect on the diseased cell can be used in combination with one or more immunotherapy agents for additive or synergistic efficacy against solid tumors.
  • a tumor associated macrophage MerT inhibiting amount of a Mer T J is used in combination or alternation with the immunomodulatory agent.
  • a host tumor survival- signal inhibiting, antiviral or antibacterial amount of a Mer T I is used in combination or alternation with the immunomodulatory agent.
  • Immunomodulators are small molecules or biologic agents that treat a disease by inducing, enhancing or suppressing the host's immune system.
  • one or more immunomodulators are selected that induce or enhance the host's immune system.
  • Some immunomodulators boost the host's immune system and others help train the host's immune system to better attack tumor cells.
  • Other immunomodulators target proteins that help cancer grow.
  • Antibodies are typically administered as monoclonals, although that is not required.“Naked monoclonal antibodies” work by attaching to antigens on tumor cells. Some antibodies can act as a marker for the body's immune system to destroy the tumor cells. Others block signaling agents for tumor cells. Antibodies can generally be used to bind to any signaling or metabolic agent that directly or indirectly facilitates tumor growth. Examples are alemtuzumab (Campath) which binds to CD52 antigen, and
  • trastuzumab (Herceptin), which binds to the HER2 protein.
  • an antibody can be used that is conjugated to another moiety that increases it delivery or efficacy.
  • the antibody can be connected to a cytotoxic drug or a radiolabel.
  • Conjugated antibodies are sometimes referred to as“tagged, labeled or loaded”.
  • Radiolabeled antibodies have small radioactive particles attached to them. Examples are Zevalin, which is an antibody against CD20 used to treat lymphoma.
  • Chemolabeled antibodies are antibodies that have cytotoxic agents attached to them.
  • Adcetris which targets CD30
  • Kadcyla which targets HER2.
  • Ontak while not an antibody, is similar in that it is interleukin-2 attached to a toxin from diphtheria.
  • cancer vaccine Another category of immunotherapy that can be used in the presently described subject matter is a cancer vaccine.
  • Most cancer vaccines are prepared from tumor cells, parts of tumor cells or pure antigens.
  • the vaccine can be used with an adjuvant to help boost the immune response.
  • An example is Provenge, which is the first cancer vaccine approved by the US FDA.
  • the vaccine can for example be a dendritic cell vaccine or a vector-based vaccine
  • Nonspecific tumor immunotherapies and adjuvants include compounds that stimulate the immune system to do a better job at attacking the tumor cells.
  • Such immunotherapies include cytokines, interleukins, interferons (a primarily but can be also b or g).
  • Specific agents include granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor (GM-CSF), IL-12, IL-7, IL-21, drugs that target CTLA-4 (such as Yervoy, which is Ipilimumab) and drugs that target PD-l or PDL-l (such as for example, nivolumab (BMS), pembrolizumab (Merck), pidilizumab (CureTech/Teva), AMP -244 (Amplimmune/GSK), BMS-936559 (BMS), and MEDI4736 (Roche/Genentech)).
  • GM-CSF granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor
  • IL-12 such as
  • thalidomide lenalidomide
  • Additional therapeutic agents that can be used in combination with the MerTK inhibitor include bispecific antibodies, chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) T-cell therapy and tumor-infiltrating
  • lymphocytes are lymphocytes.
  • a compound described herein can be combined with at least one immunosuppressive agent.
  • the immunosuppressive agent is preferably selected from the group consisting of a calcineurin inhibitor, e.g. a cyclosporin or an ascomycin, e.g. Cyclosporin A (NEORAL®), FK506 (tacrolimus), pimecrolimus, a mTOR inhibitor, e.g. rapamycin or a derivative thereof, e.g.
  • Sirolimus (RAPAMUNE®), Everolimus (Certican®), temsirolimus, zotarolimus, biolimus-7, biolimus-9, a rapalog, e.g.ridaforolimus, azathioprine, campath 1H, a SIP receptor modulator, e.g. fmgolimod or an analogue thereof, an anti IL-8 antibody, mycophenolic acid or a salt thereof, e.g. sodium salt, or a prodrug thereof, e.g.
  • Mycophenolate Mofetil (CELLCEPT®), OKT3 (ORTHOCLONE OKT3®), Prednisone, ATGAM®, THYMOGLOBULIN®, Brequinar Sodium, OKT4, T10B9.A-3A, 33B3.1, l5-deoxyspergualin, tresperimus,
  • Leflunomide ARAVA® CTLAI-Ig, anti-CD25, anti-IL2R, Basiliximab (SIMULECT®), Daclizumab (ZENAPAX®), mizorbine, methotrexate, dexamethasone, ISAtx-247, SDZ ASM 981 (pimecrolimus, Elidel®), CTLA4lg (Abatacept), belatacept, LFA3 lg, etanercept (sold as Enbrel® by Immunex), adalimumab (Humira®), infliximab (Remicade®), an anti- LFA-l antibody, natalizumab (Antegren®), Enlimomab, gavilimomab, antithymocyte immunoglobulin, siphzumab, Alefacept efalizumab, pentasa, mesalazine, asacol, codeine phosphate, be
  • immunomodulatory agents that reverse the MerTK -induced suppression of proimflammatory cytokines such as wound healing cytokines (IL-10 and GAS6) and enhance the expression of acute inflammatory cytokines (IL-12 and IL-6).
  • proimflammatory cytokines such as wound healing cytokines (IL-10 and GAS6) and enhance the expression of acute inflammatory cytokines (IL-12 and IL-6).
  • the aminopyrimidine compounds can“re-normalize” or“re-program” the host microenvironment in the diseased tissue area to attack the diseased cells.
  • This immunostimulatory activity can be used therapeutically to treat a host with a tumor, cancer or other neoplasm, or alternatively, to treat a host with an infection, for example, a viral or bacterial infection.
  • a MERTK -negative (-/-) tumor or cancer may be used for the treatment of a MERTK -negative (-/-) tumor or cancer.
  • the cancer is a MERTK -negative (-/-) breast cancer.
  • one or more of the compounds disclosed herein can be used as adjunctive therapy for its immunostimulatory effect as a means to increase the efficacy of the antineoplastic standard of care therapies, such as chemotherapeutic compounds or radiation.
  • one or more of the compounds disclosed herein can be used as adjunctive therapy for its immunostimulatory effect as a means to increase the efficacy of the antiviral or antibacterial standard of care therapies.
  • a disclosed compound or composition is administered to a host in an immunomodulatory effective amount to inhibit Mer tyrosine kinase activity in the host's tumor associated macrophage to suppress tumor immunity.
  • the dosage of the Mer TKI administered as an immunomodulatory agent to stimulate innate anti-tumor immunity is lower than a dosage of a Mer TKI administered to a host as a direct anti-cancer agent.
  • the Mer TKI is administered at a dosage which exhibits immunomodulatory but not direct cytotoxic effect.
  • the cancer is a MERTK -negative (-/-) cancer.
  • chemotherapeutic agent results in the apoptosis of tumor cells, exposing antigenic tumor proteins.
  • the host's innate immune system is thus stimulated to recognize the antigenic apoptotic components from the tumor cells after chemotherapy or ionizing radiation and mount an immune response.
  • the administration of a chemotherapeutic agent results in the apoptosis of tumor cells, exposing antigenic tumor proteins.
  • the host's innate immune system is thus stimulated to recognize the antigenic apoptotic components from the tumor cells after chemotherapy or ionizing radiation and mount an immune response.
  • the administration of a chemotherapeutic agent results in the apoptosis of tumor cells, exposing antigenic tumor proteins.
  • the host's innate immune system is thus stimulated to recognize the antigenic apoptotic components from the tumor cells after chemotherapy or ionizing radiation and mount an immune response.
  • the administration of a chemotherapeutic agent results in the apoptosis of tumor cells, exposing antigenic tumor proteins.
  • chemotherapeutic agent or ionizing radiation before, with or subsequently followed by the administration of a Mer TKI is carried out using the normal standard of care
  • the standard of care protocol of the chemotherapeutic is changed in a manner that causes less toxicity to the host due to the adjunctive or synergistic activity of the Mer TKI.
  • a method for the treatment of a tumor includes administering an effective amount of a Mer TKI to inhibit TK signaling in a tumor associated macrophage, without inhibiting the survival signal in the tumor itself.
  • the Mer TKI can be used to ramp up the immune response to the tumor by inhibiting macrophage tumorogenic tolerance during normal tumor chemotherapeutic agent.
  • the immunomodulatory dosage of the Mer TKI can be given prior to, with or after chemotherapeutic therapy and can be used simultaneously with or intermittently with the chemotherapeutic therapy.
  • less chemotherapeutic therapy is needed than the normal standard of care defined for that chemotherapeutic agent, due to the increased efficacy of the immune response in the surrounding tumor microenvironment.
  • a dose of Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter is given as a type of adjunctive therapy with the chemotherapeutic agent.
  • a Mer TKI is administered to a host having a cancer as an immunomodulatory agent to inhibit Mer tyrosine kinase activity in a tumor associated macrophage in order to suppress tumor immunity.
  • the dosage of the Mer TKI administered as an immunomodulatory agent to stimulate innate anti-tumor immunity is lower than a dosage of a Mer TKI adniinistered to a host as a direct anti -cancer agent.
  • the Mer TKI is administered at a dosage which exhibits immunomodulatory but not direct cytotoxic effects on the cancer.
  • the dose associated with the immunomodulatory effect of an active compound of the presently described subject matter is about 2-fold, about 3 -fold, about 4-fold, about 5- fold, about 6-fold, about 7-fold, about 8-fold, about 9-fold, about 10- fold or greater lower than the dose associated with a direct survival -signal inhibiting anti tumor or cytotoxic effect, or the direct antiviral or antibacterial effect.
  • the dose used to induce an immunomodulatory effect in a host is between about 0.5 mg and about 150 mg.
  • the dose is about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5mg, about 10 mg, about 12 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 110 mg, about 125 mg, about 140 mg, or about 150 mg.
  • an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition can be administered as an immunomodulatory agent to stimulate the innate immune system.
  • This immunostimulatory activity can be used therapeutically to treat a host with an infection.
  • the infection is a viral infection.
  • the infection is a bacterial infection.
  • an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition can be used to treat a host bearing any virus-related infection where the virus has a virion envelope phosphatidyl serine that complexes with MerTK to achieve viral entry or is otherwise facilitated by MerTK in the infectious process or maintenance.
  • the virus may be an enveloped virus or a non-enveloped virus.
  • the host is infected or threatened to become infected with a virus selected from, for example, Flaviviridae viruses, including Flavivirus (such as Yellow Fever, West Nile and Dengue), Hepacivirus (Hepatitis C virus,“HCV”), Pegivirus and Pestivirus (Bovine viral diarrhea virus); Filoviridae viruses, including Ebola viruses; Togaviridae viruses, including
  • Chikungunya virus Chikungunya virus; Coronaviruses, such as SARS (Severe acute respiratory syndrome) and MERS (Middle East respiratory syndrome); Orthomyxoviridae viruses, for example influenza; Paramyxoviridae viruses, for example Respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), measles and mumps; and Caliciviridae viruses, including Lagovirus, Vesivirus, and Sapovirus and Norovirus (Norwalk -like virus), and Lentiviruses, for example, HIV.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination or alternation with another anti-viral agent for combination therapy.
  • the host to be treated may be infected with an enveloped virus including, but not limited to, viruses of the following families: Bomaviridae, Bunyaviridae, Coronaviridae, Filoviridae, Flaviridae, Hepadnaviridae, Herpesviridae, Nyamiviridae, Orthomyxoviridae, Paramyxoviridae, Poxyiridae, Retroviridae, Rhabdoviridae, and Togaviridae.
  • viruses form the Bunyaviridae family include, but are not limited to, bunya viruses such as La Crosse virus and Hantaan.
  • viruses from the Coronaviridae family include, but are not limited to, coronaviruses such as SARS virus or Toroviruses.
  • viruses from the Filoviradae family include, but are not limited to, Ebola and Marburg.
  • viruses from the Flaviridae family include, but are not limited to, dengue, encephalitis viruses including West Nile virus, Japanese encephalitis virus and yellow fever virus and Hepatitis C virus.
  • viruses from the Hepadnaviridae family include, but are not limited to, Hepatitis B. Examples of viruses from the
  • Herpesviridae family include, but are not limited to, cytomegalovirus, herpes simplex viruses 1 and 2, HHV-6, HHV-7, HHV-8, pseudorabies virus, and varicella zoster virus.
  • viruses from the Orthomyxoviridae family include, but are not limited to, influenza virus.
  • viruses from the Paramyxoviridae family include, but are not limited to, measles, metapneumovirus, mumps, parainfluenza, respiratory syncytial virus, and sendai.
  • viruses from the Poxviridae family include, ' but are not limited to, pox viruses such as smallpox, monkey pox, and MoUuscum contagiosum virus, variola viruses, vaccinia virus, and yatapox viruses such as Tanapox and Yabapox.
  • viruses from the Retroviridae family include, but are not limited to, Coltiviruses such as CTFV and Banna virus, human immunodeficiency viruses such as HIV-l and HTV-2, murine leukemia virus, simian immunodeficiency virus, feline immunodeficiency virus, human T-cell leukemia viruses 1 and 2, and XMRV.
  • viruses from the Rhabdoviridae family include, but are not limited to, vesicular stomatitis and rabies.
  • viruses from the Togaviridae family include, but are not limited to, rubella viruses or alpha viruses such as Chikungunya virus, Eastern equine encephalitis virus, O'nyong'nyong virus, Ross River virus, Semliki Forest virus, Sindbis, Venezuelan equine encephalitis or Western equine encephalitis virus.
  • the host is infected with Chikungunya virus. In some embodiments, the host is infected with Ebola virus. In some embodiments, an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination with brincidofovir
  • the host is infected with a non-enveloped virus, sch as, but not limited to, viruses of the following families: Adenoviridae, Arenaviridae, Bimaviridae, Calciviridae, Iridoviridae, Ophioviridae Parvoviradae, Papillomaviridae, Papovaviridae, Picornaviridae, and Reoviridae.
  • viruses from the Adenoviridae family include, but are not limited to adenoviruses.
  • viruses from the Arenaviradae family include, but are not limited to, hemorrhagic fever viruses such as Guanarito, LCMV, Lassa, Junin, and Machupo.
  • viruses from the Iridoviridae family include, but are not limited to, African swine fever virus.
  • viruses from the Papillomavirus family include, but are not limited to, papillomaviruses.
  • viruses from the Papovaviridae family include, but are not limited to, polyoma viruses such as BK virus and JC virus.
  • viruses from the Parvoviridae family include, but are not limited to,
  • parvoviruses such as human bocavirus and adeno-associated virus.
  • viruses from the Picomaviridae family include, but are not limited to, aptoviruses, cardioviruses, coxsackieviruses, echoviruses, enteric viruses, enteroviruses, foot and mouth disease virus, hepatitis A virus, hepatoviruses, Poliovirus, and rhinovirus.
  • viruses from the Reoviradae family include, but are not limited to, orbiviruses, reoviruses and rotaviruses.
  • a host is infected with a virus such as an astroviruses, caliciviruses including but not limited to, Norovirus and Norwalk, and Hepeviruses including, but not limited to, Hepatitis E.
  • a virus such as an astroviruses, caliciviruses including but not limited to, Norovirus and Norwalk, and Hepeviruses including, but not limited to, Hepatitis E.
  • a compound described herein can be administered to a host suffering from a viral infection in combination with another anti-viral or anti-infective compound.
  • Antiviral compounds that can be used in combination with the compounds described herein include, but are not limited to, abacavir, acyclovir, adefovir, amantadine, amprenavir, ampligen, arbitol, atazanavir, balavir, boceprevir, boceprevirertet, cidofovir, dolutegravir, darunavir, delavirdine, didanosine, docosanol, edoxudine, efavirenz,
  • emtricitabine epivir, enfuvirtide, entecavir, famciclovir, fomivirsen, fosamprenavir, foscarnet, fosfonet, ganciclovir, ibacitabine, imunovir, idoxuridine, imiquimod, indinavir, lamivudine, Iopinavir, loviride, maraviroc, moroxydine, neJfmavir, nevirapine, nexavir, oseltamivir, penciclovir, peramivir, pleconaril, podophyllotoxin, raltegravir, ribavirin, rilpivirine, rimantadine, pyramidine, saquinavir, simeprevir, sofosbuvir, stavudine, telaprevir, tenofovir, tipranavir, trifluridine, trizivir, tromant
  • a host is infected with a human immunodeficiency virus and is administered a compound described herein in combination with the anti-HIV combination drug, such as Atripla® or other drug that includes emtricitabine.
  • the patient with the human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with atazanavir, ritonavir, or Truvada® in combination with a compound described herein.
  • the patient infected with human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination of dolutegravir, Truvada® and a compound described herein.
  • human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination dolutegravir, Epzicom® and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with atazanavir, ritonavir, or Truvada® in combination with a compound described herein.
  • the patient infected with human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination of dolutegravir, Truvada® and a compound described herein
  • immunodeficiency virus can be treated with a combination of raltegravir, Truvada® and a compound described herein.
  • immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination of Complera® and a compound described herein. It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that a host infected with HIV can be treated with a number of combinations of drugs depending on the mutation pattern of the virus. The patient can be treated with an appropriate combination of drugs in combination with a compound described herein.
  • the host is infected with a hepatitis C virus and is treated with an anti -hepatitis C drug in addition to the active compound described herein.
  • the patient can be treated with a combination of SovaldiTM, Harvoni®, ribavirin, and/or a pegylated interferon and a compound described herein.
  • the pegylated interferon is Peglntron®.
  • the pegylated interferon is Pegasys®.
  • the host infected with hepatitis C virus is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin and a compound described herein.
  • the host infected with hepatitis C virus is treated with Harvoni®, ribavirin and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C virus is treated with a combination of OlysioTM, ribavirin, a pegylated interferon and a compound described herein.
  • the pegylated interferon is Peglntron®. In some embodiments, the pegylated interferon is Pegasys®.
  • the host is infected with a hepatitis C virus and is treated with a combination of ABT-267, ABT-333 and ABT-450/ritonavir, in addition to an active compound described herein. In some embodiments, the host is infected with a hepatitis C virus and is treated with a combination of MK-5172 and MK-8742, in addition to an active compound described herein.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with a combination of SovaldiTM, ribavirin, a pegylated interferon and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with SovaldiTM and a compound described herein for 12 weeks followed by ribavirin, pegylated interferon and a compound described herein for 24 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 2 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 3 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 3 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 4 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 4 is treated with a combination of OlysioTM, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks followed by ribavirin, pegylated interferon and a compound described herein for 24-28 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 5 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 5 is treated with ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 48 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 6 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 6 is treated with ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 48 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with Sovaldi , Olysio , ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 2 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks.
  • a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 3 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks.
  • a patient infected with hepatitis C genotype 4 is treated with SovaldiTM, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks.
  • a host infected with papilloma virus is treated with imiquimod and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with papilloma virus is treated with cryotherapy and a compound described herein.
  • papilloma virus is surgically removed from a host and the host is treated with a compound described herein. Jn some embodiments, the host receives a compound described herein prior to, during, and post-surgery. In some embodiments, the patient receives a compound described herein post-surgery.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 is treated with Famvir® and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 is treated with acyclovir and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 is treated with acyclovir and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 is treated with Valtrex® and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 is treated with Valtrex® and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to'treatment with acyclovir.
  • a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to treatment with acyclovir. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to treatment with Valtrex®. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to treatment with
  • a host infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV is treated with acyclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with Valtrex® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments ahost infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with famciclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with foscamet and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with varicella zoster virus is treated with a compound described herein prior to vaccination with Zostavax®. In some embodiments, a host infected with varicella zoster virus is treated with a compound described herein prior to and post vaccination with Zostavax®.
  • a host infected with influenza virus is treated with Relenza® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with influenza virus is treated with Tamiflu® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host is infected with influenza virus and is treated with amantadine and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with influenza virus is treated with rimantadine and a compound described herein.
  • a hostinfected with cytomegalovirus is treated with valganciclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with cytomegalovirus is treated with ganciclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with cytomegalovirus is treated with foscarnet and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with cytomegalovirus is treated with cidofovir and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with
  • a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with adefovir and a compound described herein.
  • a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with tenofovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with telbivudine and a compound described herein.
  • a disclosed compound or composition is used in an effective amount to treat a host infected with a bacterial infection.
  • the bacteria treated is, for example, a Gram-negative bacilli (GNB), especially Escherichia coli, Gram positive cocci (GPC), Staphylococcus aureus, Enterococcus faecalis, or Streptococcus pneumoniae.
  • GNB Gram-negative bacilli
  • the bacterial infection may be caused, for example, by a Gram-negative bacteria, including, but not limited to Escherichia coli, Salmonella, and other Enterobacteriaceae, Pseudomonas, Moraxella, Helicobacter, Stenotrophomonas,
  • Bdellovibrio acetic acid bacteria, Legionella, Staphylococcus aureus, Hemophilus influenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, Pseudomonas aeruginosa,
  • the bacterial infection may be caused, for example, by a Gram-positive species from the following genera: Bacillus, Listeria,
  • Staphylococcus Enterococcus, Lactobacillus, Lactococcus, Leuconostoc, Pedicoccus, Streptococcus, Acetobacterium, Clostridium, Eubacterium, Heliobacterium, Heliospirillum, Megasphaera, Pectinatus, Selenomonas, Zymophilus, Sporomusa, Mycoplasma, Spiroplasma, Ureaplas a, or Erysipelothrix.
  • the bacterial infection is associated with liver failure.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an antibiotic or another anti -bacterial agent.
  • the bacterial infection is associated with liver failure.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an antibiotic or another anti-bacterial agent.
  • a patient is suffering from acute-on-chronic liver failure (ACLF).
  • ACLF acute-on-chronic liver failure
  • a patient is suffering from acute liver failure.
  • a patient is suffering from chronic liver failure.
  • the liver failure is caused by a disease or condition selected from alcoholic liver disease, chronic viral hepatitis type C, chronic viral hepatitis type B, chronic bile duct blockage, Wilson's disease, hemochromatosis, exposure to drug and toxins, autoimmune hepatitis, cystic fibrosis, alpha antitrypsin deficiency, obesity or schistosomiasis.
  • the fibrosis is a liver fibrosis.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an antibiotic for the prevention or treatment of bacterial infections.
  • antibiotics include, but are not limited to, cefotaxime (Claforan), ofloxacin (Floxin), norfloxacin (Noroxin) or trimethoprim sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra). d. USE AS AN ANTI-PLATELET AGENT
  • a compound described herein is used in the treatment of blot clot (thrombus) formation in a host in need thereof.
  • the host is suffering from coronary artery disease, peripheral vascular disease, or cerebrovascular disease.
  • a compound described herein is administered to a host prior to any medical or surgical procedure in which diminished coagulation potential is desirable.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with another anti -thrombotic or anti -clotting agent.
  • a disclosed compound or composition as described herein is provided for use in treating blot clot (thrombus) formation in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering an active compound as described herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition, salt, isotopic analog, or prodrug thereof.
  • the treatment of blood clot formation is in, for example, a subject with coronary artery disease, peripheral vascular disease, or cerebrovascular disease, or the treatment is given prior to any medical or surgical procedure in which diminished coagulation potential is desirable.
  • Coronary artery disease includes, for example, any coronary dysfunction (pathological state) resulting from coronary artherosclerosis, i.e. partial or total occlusion of coronary vessels.
  • the term also includes a range of various acute and chronical pathological states comprising stable and unstable angina pectoris (SAP and UAP, respectively), left ventricular dysfunction LVD, (congestive) heart failure CHF, myocardial death.
  • Peripheral vascular disease includes, for example, occlusive or functional peripheral arterial disease (PAD).
  • occlusive PAD examples include peripheral arterial occlusion, which may be acute, and Buerger's disease (thomboangiitis obliterans).
  • functional PAD examples include Raynaud's disease, Raynaud's phenomenon, and acrocyanosis.
  • Cerebrovascular disease includes, for example, any abnormality of the brain resulting from a pathologic process of a blood vessel.
  • the cerebrovascular disease is selected from cerebral ischemia, cerebral hemorrhage, ischemic stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, or ischemic reperfusion injury resulting from reintroduction of blood flow following cerebral ischemia or ischemic stroke.
  • the medical or surgical procedure is pulmonary vein ablation.
  • the treatment of blood clot formation is in a host having thrombi in blood vessels from pathologies or treatments including, for example, myocardial infarction, unstable angina, atrial fibrillation, stroke, renal damage, percutaneous
  • translumenal coronary angioplasty athreosclerosis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, endotoxemia (i.e., the presence of endotoxins in the blood);: pulmonary embolism and deep vein thrombosis.
  • endotoxemia i.e., the presence of endotoxins in the blood
  • pulmonary embolism and deep vein thrombosis the compounds described herein are
  • a host is administered an effective amount of a compound described herein due to the formation of clots resulting from some pathological conditions (for example, genetic mutation of VWF cleaving protease, ADAMT13), which may cause spontaneous binding of VWF to platelets resulting in formation of microthrombi in blood vessels leading to thrombotic
  • Microangiopathy is a disease of blood vessels in which the walls of very small blood vessels (capillaries) become so thick and weak that they bleed, leak protein, and slow the flow of blood.
  • the treatment is in a patient with hemolytic uremic syndrome.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an additional anti-platelet agent.
  • anti-platelet agents include, but are not limited to, aspirin, tirofiban (Aggrastat), Aggrenox, Agrylin, triflusal (Disgren), Flolan, eptifibatide (Integrilin), dipyridamole (Presantine), cilostazol (Pletal), abciximab (ReoPro), and Terutroban.
  • the Mer TKI and the additional anti- platelet agent act synergistically.
  • the use of a Mer TKI in combination with an additional anti-platelet agent provides for increased anti -thrombotic or anti-clotting effects without an increase in the standard of care dosage.
  • the additional anti-platelet agent is an adenosine diphosphate (ADP) receptor inhibitor.
  • ADP receptor inhibitors include, but are not limited to, clopidogrel (Plavix), prasugrel (Effient), ticagrelor (Brilinta), ticlopidine (Ticlid), N6- methyl-2'-deoxyadenosine-3',5'-bisphosphate (MRS2179; P 2 Yl inhibitor), and 2- methylthioadenosine 5 '-monophosphate triethylammonium salt (2-Me-SAMP; P 2 Yl2 inhibitor).
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with multiple anti-platelet agents. In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administerd in combination with N6-methyl-2'- deoxyadenosine-3',5'- bisphosphate and 2-methylthioadenosine 5 '-monophosphate triethylammonium salt.
  • an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an anti -coagulant.
  • the anti-coagulant is a heparin composition.
  • the heparin composition is a low molecular weight heparin composition.
  • Low molecular weight heparin compositions are well known to those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to, tinzaparin, certoparin, pamaparin, nadroparin, ardeparin, enoxaparin, reviparin, dalteparin, and fraxiparin. Additional examples of anticoagulants include, but are not limited to, warfarin (Coumadin), Fragmin, Hep-Lock, Lovenox, and Miradon. e. USE AS NANOPARTICLE COMPOSITIONS OR CARRIERS
  • an effective amount of an active compound as described herein is incorporated into nanoparticles, e.g. for convenience of delivery and/or extended release delivery.
  • the use of materials in nanoscale provides one the ability to modify fundamental physical properties such as solubility, diffusivity, blood circulation half- life, drug release characteristics, and immunogenicity.
  • nanoparticle-based therapeutic and diagnostic agents have been developed for the treatment of cancer, diabetes, pain, asthma, allergy, and infections. These nanoscale agents can provide more effective and/or more convenient routes of administration, lower therapeutic toxicity, extend the product life cycle, and ultimately reduce health-care costs.
  • nanoparticles allow targeted delivery and controlled release.
  • nanoparticle-based drug delivery can be used to release drugs at a sustained rate and thus lower the frequency of administration, deliver drugs in a target manner to minimize systemic side effects, or deliver two or more drugs simultaneously for combination therapy to generate a synergistic effect and suppress drug resistance.
  • nanotechnology -based therapeutic products have been approved for clinical use.
  • liposomal drugs and polymer-based conjugates account for more than 80% of the products. See, Zhang, L., et al., Nanoparticles in Medicine: Therapeutic
  • Optimal solid lipid nanoparticles can be produced in a controlled fashion when a fraction of lipid in the crystalline alpha form can be created and preserved.
  • the SLN carrier has a built in trigger mechanism as lipids transform from the alpha to beta form and consequently control drug release.
  • Drug release profiles can be modified according to the composition of the lipid matrix, surfactant concentration and production parameters. See, Muller, R.H., et al., Solid lipid nanoparticles (SLN) for controlled drug delivery - a review of the state of the art, Eur. H. Pharm. Biopharm., 50: 161-177, 2000. Consien et al.
  • lipid nanoparticles having novel amino-lipids that form lipid nanoparticles and their use for the intracellular delivery of biologically active compounds, e.g., nucleic acids. See, US 8,691,750 to Consien et al.
  • Kanwar has recently disclosed alginate adsorbed chitosan adsorbed lactoferrin adsorbed calcium phosphate nanoparticles and the controlled release of lactoferrin from the nanoparticles. See, WO 2012/145801 to Kanwar.
  • Armes et al. have recently disclosed polymer-templated core-shell nanoparticles adapted to facilitate controlled release of at least one active agent into a system in response to controlled changes in the pH of the system. See, US 8,580,311 to Armes, S. et al. incorporated by reference herein.
  • Nanoparticles may be prepared using a wide variety of methods known in the art.
  • nanoparticles can be formed by methods as nanoprecipitation, flow focusing fluidic channels, spray drying, single and double emulsion solvent evaporation, solvent extraction, phase separation, milling, microemulsion procedures, microfabrication, nanofabrication, sacrificial layers, simple and complex coacervation, and other methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • aqueous and organic solvent syntheses for monodisperse semiconductor, conductive, magnetic, organic, and other nanomaterials have been described (Pellegrino et ah, 2005, Small, 1 :48; Murray et ah, 2000, Ann. Rev. Mat.
  • Nanoparticles may comprise natural polymers, including but not limited to chitosan, alginate, dextran, gelatin, and albumin, and synthetic polymers such as, but not limited to, poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), (3- hydroxybutyrate-co-3-hydroxyvalerate) (PHBV), poly(sebacic anhydride), poly(e- caprolactone), polystyrene, thermoresponsive (i.e., NIPAAm and CMCTS-g-PDEA) and pH- responsive (i.e., Eudragit LI 00, Eudragit S and AQOAT AS-MG) polymers.
  • PLGA poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
  • PHBV 3- hydroxybutyrate-co-3-hydroxyvalerate)
  • PHBV poly(sebacic anhydride)
  • poly(e- caprolactone) polystyrene
  • thermoresponsive i.e., NIPAAm and CMCTS-g
  • the polymeric particle is between about 0.1 nm to about 10000 nm, between about 1 nm to about 1000 nm, between about 10 nm and 1000 nm, between about 100 nm and 800 nm, between about 400 nm and 600 nm, or about 500 nm.
  • the micro-particles are about 0.1 nm, 0.5 nm, 1.0 nm, 5.0 nm, 10 nm, 25 nm,
  • the compounds described herein are covalently coupled to a polystyrene particle, PLGA particle, PLA particle, or other nanoparticle.
  • the nanoparticle can be solid or hollow and can comprise one or more layers. In some embodiments, each layer has a unique composition and unique properties relative to the other layer(s).
  • the nanoparticle may have a core/shell structure, wherein the core is one layer (e.g. a polymeric core) and the shell is a second layer (e.g. a lipid bilayer or monolayer). In some embodiments, the nanoparticle may comprise a plurality of different layers. In some embodiments, the compounds described herein can be incorporated into or surrounded by one or more layers.
  • the nanoparticles comprising the compounds described herein may optionally comprise one or more lipids.
  • a nanoparticle may comprise a liposome.
  • a nanoparticle may comprise a lipid bilayer.
  • a nanoparticle may comprise a lipid monolayer.
  • a nanoparticle may comprise a micelle.
  • a nanoparticle may comprise a core comprising a polymeric matrix surrounded by a lipid layer (e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.).
  • a nanoparticle may comprise a non-polymeric core (e.g., metal particle, quantum dot, ceramic particle, bone particle, viral particle, proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, etc.) surrounded by a lipid layer (e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.).
  • a non-polymeric core e.g., metal particle, quantum dot, ceramic particle, bone particle, viral particle, proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, etc.
  • lipid layer e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.
  • the nanoparticle may comprise metal particles, quantum dots, ceramic particles, etc.
  • a non-polymeric nanoparticle is an aggregate of non-polymeric components, such as an aggregate of metal atoms (e.g., gold atoms).
  • nanoparticles may optionally comprise one or more amphiphilic entities.
  • an amphophilic entity can promote the production of nanoparticles with increased stability, improved uniformity, or increased viscosity.
  • amphiphilic entities can be associated with the interior surface of a lipid membrane (e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.).
  • lipid membrane e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.
  • amphiphilic entities known in the art are suitable for use in making nanoparticles useful in the presently described subject matter.
  • Such amphiphilic entities include, but are not limited to, phosphoglycerides; phosphatidylcholines; dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC);
  • dioleylphosphatidyl ethanolamine DOPE
  • dioleyloxypropyltri ethyl ammonium DOTMA
  • dioleoylphosphatidylcholine cholesterol; cholesterol ester; diacylglycerol;
  • diacylglycerolsuccinate diphosphatidyl glycerol (DPPG); hexanedecanol
  • fatty alcohols such as polyethylene glycol (PEG); polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether
  • a surface active fatty acid such as palmitic acid or oleic acid
  • fatty acids fatty acid monoglycerides; fatty acid diglycerides; fatty acid amides; sorbitan trioleate (Span®85) glycocholate; sorbitan monolaurate (Span®20); polysorbate 20 (Tween®20); polysorbate 60 (Tween®60);
  • polysorbate 65 (Tween®65); polysorbate 80 (Tween®80); polysorbate 85 (Tween®85); polyoxyethylene monostearate; surfactin; a poloxomer; a sorbitan fatty acid ester such as sorbitan trioleate; lecithin; lysolecithin; phosphatidylserine; phosphatidylinositol;
  • sphingomyelin phosphatidylethanolamine (cephalin); cardiolipin; phosphatide acid;
  • amphophilic entity component may be a mixture of different amphophilic entities. Those skilled in the art will recognize that this is an exemplary, not comprehensive, list of substances with surfactant activity. Any amphiphilic entity may be used in the production of nanoparticles to be used in accordance with the presently described subject matter.
  • a nanoparticle may optionally comprise one or more carbohydrates.
  • Carbohydrates may be natural or synthetic.
  • a carbohydrate may be a derivatized natural carbohydrate.
  • a carbohydrate comprises monosaccharide or disaccharide, including but not limited to glucose, fructose, galactose, ribose, lactose, sucrose, maltose, trehalose, cellbiose, mannose, xylose, arabinose, glucoronic acid, galactoronic acid, mannuronic acid, glucosamine, galatosamine, and neuramic acid.
  • a carbohydrate is a polysaccharide, including but not limited to pullulan, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC), hydroxycellulose (HC), methylcellulose (C), dextran, cyclodextran, glycogen,
  • the nanoparticle does not comprise (or specifically exclude) carbohydrates, such as a polysaccharide.
  • the carbohydrate may comprise a carbohydrate derivative such as a sugar alcohol, including but not limited to mannitol, sorbitol, xylitol, erythritol, maltitol, and - lactitol.
  • a carbohydrate derivative such as a sugar alcohol, including but not limited to mannitol, sorbitol, xylitol, erythritol, maltitol, and - lactitol.
  • the associated nanoparticle can comprise one or more polymers.
  • the nanoparticle comprises one or more polymers that are a non-methoxy-terminated, pluronic polymer. In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, or 99% (weight/weight) of the polymers that make up the
  • nanoparticles are non-methoxy-terminated, pluronic polymers.
  • all of the polymers that make up the nanoparticle are non-methoxy-terminated, pluronic polymers.
  • the nanoparticle comprises one or more polymers that are a non- methoxy-terminated polymer.
  • at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, or 99% (weight/weight) of the polymers that make up the nanoparticles are non- methoxy-terminated polymers.
  • all of the polymers that make up the nanoparticle are non-methoxy-terminated polymers.
  • the nanoparticle comprises one or more polymers that do not comprise pluronic polymer.
  • such a polymer can be surrounded by a coating layer (e.g., liposome, lipid monolayer, micelle, etc.).
  • various elements of the nanoparticle can be coupled with the polymer.
  • polymers include, but are not limited to polyethylenes,
  • polycarbonates e.g. poly(l,3-dioxan-2one)
  • polyanhydrides e.g. poly(sebacic anhydride)
  • polypropylfumerates e.g. polyamides (e.g. polycaprolactam), polyacetals, polyethers, polyesters (e.g., polylactide, polyglycolide, polylactide-co-glycolide, polycaprolactone,
  • polyhydroxyacid e.g. poly((P-hydroxyalkanoate))
  • poly(orthoesters) polycyanoacrylates, polyvinyl alcohols, polyurethanes, polyphosphazenes, polyacrylates, polymethacrylates, polyureas, polystyrenes, and polyamines, polylysine, polylysine-PEG copolymers, and poly(ethyleneimine), poly(ethylene imine)-PEG copolymers.
  • nanoparticles include polymers which have been approved for use in humans by the ET.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) under 21 C.F.R. ⁇ 177.2600, including but not limited to polyesters (e.g., polylactic acid, poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid), polycaprolactone, polyvalerolactone, poly(l,3-dioxan-2one)); polyanhydrides (e.g., poly(sebacic anhydride)); polyethers (e.g., polyethylene glycol); polyurethanes;
  • FDA ET.S. Food and Drug Administration
  • polymethacrylates polyacrylates; and polycyanoacrylates.
  • polymers can be hydrophilic.
  • polymers may comprise anionic groups (e.g., phosphate group, sulphate group, carboxylate group); cationic groups (e.g., quaternary amine group); or polar groups (e.g., hydroxyl group, thiol group, amine group).
  • a nanoparticles comprising a hydrophilic polymeric matrix generates a hydrophilic environment within the nanoparticle.
  • polymers can be hydrophobic.
  • a nanoparticles comprising a hydrophobic polymeric matrix generates a hydrophobic environment within the nanoparticle. Selection of the hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the polymer may have an impact on the nature of materials that are incorporated (e.g., coupled) within the nanoparticle.
  • polymers may be modified with one or more moieties and/or functional groups.
  • moieties or functional groups can be used in accordance with the presently described subject matter.
  • polymers may be modified with polyethylene glycol (PEG), with a carbohydrate, and/or with acyclic polyacetals derived from polysaccharides (Papisov, 2001, ACS Symposium Series, 786:301).
  • embodiments may be made using the general teachings of U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,158 to Gref et al., or WO publication W02009/051837 by Von Andrian et al.
  • polymers may be modified with a lipid or fatty acid group.
  • a fatty acid group may be one or more of butyric, caproic, caprylic, capric, lauric, myristic, palmitic, stearic, arachidic, behenic, or lignoceric acid.
  • a fatty acid group may be one or more of palmitoleic, oleic, vaccenic, linoleic, alpha-linoleic, gamma-linoleic, arachidonic, gadoleic, arachidonic, eicosapentaenoic, docosahexaenoic, or erucic acid.
  • polymers may be one or more acrylic polymers.
  • acrylic polymers include, for example, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), methyl methacrylate, polymethacrylate, poly(methyl methacrylate) copolymer, polyacrylamide, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, glycidyl methacrylate copolymers, polycyanoacrylates, and combinations comprising one or more of the foregoing polymers.
  • the acrylic polymer may comprise fully-polymerized copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammoni
  • polymers can be cationic polymers.
  • cationic polymers are able to condense and/or protect negatively charged strands of nucleic acids (e.g. DNA, or derivatives thereof).
  • Amine-containing polymers such as poly(lysine) (Zauner et al.,
  • the nanoparticles may not comprise (or may exclude) cationic polymers.
  • polymers can be degradable polyesters bearing cationic side chains (Putnam et al., 1999, acromolecules, 32:3658; Barrera et al., 1993, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 115: 11010; Kwon et al., 1989, Macromolecules, 22:3250; Lim et al., 1999, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121 :5633; and Zhou et al., 1990, Macromolecules, 23:3399).
  • polyesters include poly(L-lactide-co-L4ysine) (Barrera et al., 1993, J. Am. Chem.
  • Polymers can be linear or branched polymers.
  • polymers can be dendrimers.
  • polymers can be substantially cross-linked to one another.
  • polymers can be substantially free of cross-links.
  • polymers can be used without undergoing a cross-linking step. It is further to be understood that a nanoparticle may comprise block copolymers, graft copolymers, blends, mixtures, and/or adducts of any of the foregoing and other polymers. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the polymers listed herein represent an exemplary, not comprehensive, list of polymers that can be of use in accordance with the presently described subject matter.
  • the compounds of the presently described subject matter can be coupled to a nanoparticle by any of a number of methods.
  • the coupling can be a result of bonding between the compound and the nanoparticle. This bonding can result in the compound being attached to the surface of the nanoparticle and/or contained within
  • the compounds are encapsulated by the nanoparticle as a result of the structure of the nanoparticle rather than bonding to the nanoparticle.
  • the nanoparticle comprises a polymer as provided herein, and the compounds described herein are coupled to the nanoparticle.
  • the compounds described herein may be encapsulated into nanoparticles as desirable using a variety of methods including but not limited to C. Astete et ah,“Synthesis and
  • nanoparticles are prepared by a nanoprecipitation process or spray drying. Conditions used in preparing nanoparticles may be altered to yield particles of a desired size or property (e.g., hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, external morphology, “stickiness,” shape, etc.).
  • the method of preparing the nanoparticles and the conditions (e.g., solvent, temperature, concentration, air flow rate, etc.) used may depend on the materials to be coupled to the nanoparticles and/or the composition of the polymer matrix. If particles prepared by any of the above methods have a size range outside of the desired range, particles can be sized, for example, using a sieve.
  • PRINT technology is used to manufacture nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein.
  • liposome based nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein.
  • a liposome based nanoparticle comprises a compound described herein formulated for controlled-release.
  • polymer based nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein. In some embodiments, provided herein are polymer based nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein formulated for controlled-release.
  • nanoparticles are comprised of albumin and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of a polysaccharide and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of a metal and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of gold and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of iron oxide and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of silicon and a compound described herein.
  • nanoparticles are comprised of L-glutamic acid copolymers and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of L- alanine copolymers and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of L-lysine copolymers and a compound described herein. In some embodiments,
  • nanoparticles are comprised of L-tyrosine copolymers and a compound described herein. In other embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of poly(lactic-co- glycolic acid) and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of methoxy-PEG-poly(D,L-lactide) and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of HPMA copolymer and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of polycyclodextran and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of polyglutamate and a compound described herein.
  • nanoparticles are comprised of poly(iso-hexyl-cyanoacrylate) and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of poly-L-lysine and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of PEG and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are made of combinations of polymers and a compound described herein.
  • a compound described herein is released from a nanoparticle over a period of between about 1 and about 90 days. In some embodiments, the compound is released over a period of about 3 to 28 days. In some embodiments, the compound is released over a period of about 5 to 21 days.
  • the disorder is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the tumor prior to the administering step.
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the tumor.
  • the tumor is MerTK +/+. In other embodiments, the tumor is MerTK -/-.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the cancer prior to the administering step.
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the cancer.
  • the cancer is MerTK +/+. In some embodiments, the cancer is
  • MerTK -/- Also disclosed are methods of treating an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the immunosuppressed
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the immunosuppressed microenvironment.
  • Also disclosed are methods of treating a thrombotic disorder in a subject comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for anti thrombotic therapy prior to the administering step.
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of anti -thrombotic therapy.
  • the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal is a human.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step.
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the disorder.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
  • the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In some embodiments, the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.
  • the disorder is a cancer, an infection, a fibrosis, a thrombotic disorder, or a clotting disorder.
  • the disorder is an infection.
  • the infection is a bacterial infection.
  • the infection is a viral infection.
  • the viral infection has a virion envelope phosphatidyl serine.
  • the disorder is associated with an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
  • the disorder is a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation.
  • the disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation is cancer.
  • the cancer is selected from breast cancer, cervical cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, colorectal cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer, pancreatic cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, glioma, leukemia, lymphoma, chronic myeloproliferative disorder, myelodysplastic syndrome,
  • the cancer is MerTK +/+. In some embodiments, the cancer is MerTK -/-.
  • the disorder is a thrombotic disorder or a clotting disorder.
  • thrombotic disorders include, but are not limited to, myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, and stroke.
  • the disorder is a liver disorder.
  • liver disorders include, but are not limited to, alcohol-related liver diseases, cirrhosis, non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, hepatitis, haemochromatosis, and primary biliary cirrhosis.
  • the disorder is associated with any one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase. In some embodiments, the disorder is associated with any one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In further embodiments, the disorder is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • disclosed are methods for the treatment of an infection in a subject comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, thereby treating the infection.
  • the infection is a viral infection or a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a viral infection. In further embodiments, the viral infection has a virion envelope phosphatidyl serine.
  • the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal is a human.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the infection prior to the administering step.
  • the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the infection.
  • the method further comprises administering an effective amount of an antiviral agent to the subject.
  • the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In some embodiments, the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with any one or more of Mer,
  • the infection is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with Tyro3 tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction.
  • the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, thereby treating the infection.
  • the cell is mammalian. In some embodiments, the cell is human. In some embodiments, the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
  • contacting is via administration to a mammal.
  • the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for inhibiting a TAM tyrosine kinase prior to the administering step.
  • the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a disorder related to dysfunction of a TAM tyrosine kinase prior to the administering step.
  • inhibiting Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinase is associated with treating a cancer. In further embodiments, inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase is associated with treating a cancer.
  • the compound exhibits inhibition of Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinase with an IC50 of less than about 30 mM, less than about 25 pM, less than about 20 pM, less than about 15 pM, less than about 10 pM, less than about 5 pM, less than about 1 pM, or less than about 0.5 pM.
  • the subject matter described herein relates to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder in a subject, the method comprising combining an effective amount of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the subject matter described herein relates to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for treating an infection in a subject, the method comprising combining an effective amount of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the present method includes the administration to an animal, particularly a mammal, and more particularly a human, of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound effective in the inhibition of Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinase.
  • the dose administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the presently described subject matter should be sufficient to affect a therapeutic response in the animal over a reasonable time frame.
  • dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the condition of the animal and the body weight of the animal.
  • the total amount of the compound of the present disclosure administered in a typical treatment is preferably between about 10 mg/kg and about 1000 mg/kg of body weight for mice, and between about 100 mg/kg and about 500 mg/kg of body weight, and more preferably between 200 mg/kg and about 400 mg/kg of body weight for humans per daily dose.
  • This total amount is typically, but not necessarily, administered as a series of smaller doses over a period of about one time per day to about three times per day for about 24 months, and preferably over a period of twice per day for about 12 months.
  • the size of the dose also will be determined by the route, timing and frequency of administration as well as the existence, nature and extent of any adverse side effects that might accompany the administration of the compound and the desired physiological effect. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that various conditions or disease states, in particular chronic conditions or disease states, may require prolonged treatment involving multiple administrations.
  • the subject matter described herein relates to the manufacture of a medicament comprising combining a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • kits comprising at least one compound of Formula I and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to increase one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity; (b) at least one agent known to treat a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; (c) at least one antibacterial agent; (d) at least one antiviral agent; (e) instructions for treating a disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction; (f) instructions for treating a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; or (g) instructions for treating an infection.
  • kits comprising at least one compound of Formula II and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to increase one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity; (b) at least one agent known to treat a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; (c) at least one antibacterial agent; (d) at least one antiviral agent; (e) instructions for treating a disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction; (f) instructions for treating a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; or (g) instructions for treating an infection.
  • the at least one compound and the at least one agent are co- formulated. In some embodiments, the at least one compound and the at least one agent are co-packaged.
  • kits can also comprise compounds and/or products co-packaged, co-formulated, and/or co-delivered with other components.
  • a drug manufacturer, a drug reseller, a physician, a compounding shop, or a pharmacist can provide a kit comprising a disclosed compound and/or product and another component for delivery to a patient.
  • kits can be prepared from the disclosed compounds, products, and pharmaceutical compositions. It is also understood that the disclosed kits can be employed in connection with the disclosed methods of using.
  • Microfluidic Capillary Electrophoresis (MCE) assays were performed in accordance with the procedure set forth in Zhang et al. ( JMed Chem 2013. 56 (23), 9683-9692), which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • Activity assays were performed in a 384 well, polypropylene microplate in a final volume of 50 pL of 50 mM Hepes, Ph 7.4 containing 10 mM MgCh , 1.0 mM DTT, 0.01% Triton X-100, 0.1% Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), containing 1.0 pM fluorescent substrate and ATP at the Km for each enzyme. All reactions were terminated by addition of 20 pL of 70 mM EDTA.
  • nM Kinase Peptide Substrate Kinase (nM) ATP (uM)
  • reaction mixture was ultrasonicated for 15 min, then was purified by HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water + 0. l%TFA) to yield a TFA salt of the desired product, which was treated with a 4.0 M HC1 aqueous solution and concentrated to yield the HC1 salt of the desire product (2,6-dimethylpyridin-4-yl)(4-(2- ((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidin-l- yl)methanone (43 mg, 64%) as an off-white solid.
  • the reaction mixture was under ultra- sonication for 20 min, filtered, and purified by HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water) to provide the TFA salt of the desired product, which was treated with a 4.0 M HC1 aqueous solution, ultrasonicated, and concentrated to yield the HC1 salt of the desire product trans- 4-((5-(l- (cyclohexylmethyl)piperidin-4-yl)-2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (33 mg, 84%) as an off-white solid.
  • trans-4-((2-((4-fluorovhenyl)amino)-5-(l-(methylsulfonyl)viyeridin-4-yl)vyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexanol To a mixture of /ra//.s-4-((2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-5-(piperidin-4- j 7)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexanol (40 mg, 0.10 mmol) and triethylamine (31 mg, 0.30 mmol) in THF (15 mL) was added methanesulfonyl chloride (15 mg, 0.13 mmol) at room temperature.
  • the water layer was extracted by ethyl acetate (15 mLx 3) and the combined organic phase was concentrated and purified with a pre-packed silica gel disposable column to yield the desired product, /er/-butyl 4-(4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)-2-((4-(phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidine-l- carboxylate (94 mg, 43%), as a light-yellow solid.
  • the filtrate was concentrated and purified with prep-HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water) to provide /ra//.s-4-((5-( l -methylpiperidin-4-yl)-2-((4- (phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexanol as a white solid.
  • Table 2 The compounds in Table 2 were prepared following procedures identical or analogous to those described in Examples 1-4. The requisite starting materials were commercially available, described in the literature, or readily synthesized by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Table 2 also illustrates the effects of the compounds on Mer tyrosine kinase.
  • reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen atmosphere at 90 °C for 8 h. Extraction with ethyl acetate for 3 times. The organic phase was combined and washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate. After removal of the solvent under reduced pressure, the residue was purified with pre-packed silica gel disposable column to yield tert-butyl 6-chl oro-4-(/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)-3',6'-dihydro-[3,4'-bipyridine]-r(277)-carboxylate (160 mg, 27.9 %) as a yellow solid.
  • Table 3 shows compounds prepared following procedures identical or analogous to those described in Example 5. The requisite starting materials were commercially available, described in the literature, or readily synthesized by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Table 3 also illustrates the effects of the compounds on Mer tyrosine kinase.

Abstract

Aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine containing compounds that inhibit one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity are disclosed herein. Additionally disclosed are methods of synthesis and use of the aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine containing compounds as anti-cancer agents, immunostimulatory and immunomodulatory agents, anti-platelet agents, anti-infective agents, and as adjunctive agents.

Description

AMIN OPYRIMIDINES AND AMIN OPYRIDINES AS MERTK INHIBITORS AND THEIR APPLICATION IN CANCER TREATMENT
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/672,220, filed May 16, 2018, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
FIELD
The presently disclosed subject matter relates generally to aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine containing compounds that inhibit one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity. Additionally disclosed are methods of synthesis and use of the aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine containing compounds as anti-cancer agents, immunostimulatory and immunomodulatory agents, anti platelet agents, anti-infective agents, and as adjunctive agents.
BACKGROUND
MerTK is a member of a receptor tyrosine kinase (RTK) family known as TAM, which also includes Axl and Tyro3. Each member of the TAM family contains an extracellular domain, a transmembrane domain, and a conserved intracellular kinase domain. The TAM family members undergo ligand-induced homodimerization, followed by catalytic tyrosine kinase activation and intracellular signaling. Cross-phosphorylation has been demonstrated within this RTK family, suggesting heterodimerization can also occur. These RTKs are widely expressed in many epithelial tissues and in cells of the immune, nervous, and reproductive systems. Specifically, MerTK has been found to be expressed in monocytes and in tissues of epithelial and reproductive tissue.
TAM receptor and ligand overexpression have been shown in a wide range of solid and hematological tumors, and correlate with poor prognosis in a variety of tumor types and their signals and promote survival, chemoresistance, motility and invasion. In addition, their role in diminishing the innate immune response makes their inhibition a novel mechanism for reversing the immunosuppressive tumor microenvironment.
Despite the involvement of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl in a variety of disorders and diseases including, but not limited to cancer, infectious diseases, and thrombosis, potent compounds that selectively target Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinases have remained elusive. Thus, there remains a need for compounds and compositions capable of targeting these proteins and methods of making and using same.
BRIEF SUMMARY
In several embodiments, the subject matter disclosed herein is directed to compounds of Formula I:
I
Figure imgf000003_0001
a stereoisomer, geometric isomer, tautomer, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The various substituents are as described herein.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. The pharmaceutical composition may further comprise one or more additional active agents.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of treating a disease or disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase. In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is cancer. In other embodiments, the disease or disorder is an infection. In other embodiments, the disease or disorder is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula I in immunostimmulatory therapy. In other embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula I in immunomodulatory therapy.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to methods of making the compounds of Formula I.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a kit for treating a condition mediated by one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase, comprising: a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a Formula I compound; and b) instructions for use.
In several embodiments, the subject matter disclosed herein is directed to compounds of Formula II
Figure imgf000004_0001
a stereoisomer, geometric isomer, tautomer, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The various substituents are as described herein.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula II and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. The pharmaceutical composition may further comprise one or more additional active agents.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula II in immunostimmulatory therapy. In other embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a method of using a compound of Formula II in immunomodulatory therapy.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to methods of making the compounds of Formula II.
In several embodiments, the subject matter described herein is directed to a kit for treating a condition mediated by one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase, comprising: a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a Formula II compound; and b) instructions for use.
These and other embodiments of the subject matter disclosed herein are discussed in more detail in the descriptions and examples provided below.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Disclosed herein, are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutical compositions thereof that are inhibitors or modulators of one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity. In some embodiments, the compounds of Formula I are selective inhibitors of Mer tyrosine kinase. Also disclosed are compounds of Formula II and pharmaceutical compositions thereof that are inhibitors or modulators of one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity. In certain embodiments, the compounds of Formula II are selective inhibitors of Mer tyrosine kinase. As such, the compounds and compositions disclosed herein are useful in treating diseases and disorders mediated by one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase (MerTK), Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity. An example of a method of treating is in the case of a subject who is suffering from cancer. The compounds can be used not only to combat cancer, but can also advantageously be used as
immunostimulatory and immunomodulatory agents, anti-platelet agents, anti-infective agents, and as adjunctive agents.
The presently disclosed subject matter will now be described more fully hereinafter. However, many modifications and other embodiments of the presently disclosed subject matter set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which the presently disclosed subject matter pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions. Therefore, it is to be understood that the presently disclosed subject matter is not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims.
A. DEFINITIONS
As used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms“a,”“an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to“a functional group,”“an alkyl,” or“a residue” includes mixtures of two or more such functional groups, alkyls, or residues, and the like.
As used herein, the term“about,” when referring to a measurable value such as an amount of a compound or agent of the current subject matter, dose, time, temperature, and the like, is meant to encompass variations of ±20%, ±10%, ±5%, ±1%, ±0.5%, or even ±0.1% of the specified amount. The terms“approximately,”“about,” and“substantially” as used herein represent an amount close to the stated amount that still performs a desired function or achieves a desired result. For example, in some embodiments, as the context may dictate, the terms
“approximately”,“about”, and“substantially” may refer to an amount that is within less than or equal to 10% of the stated amount. The term“generally” as used herein represents a value, amount, or characteristic that predominantly includes or tends toward a particular value, amount, or characteristic.
Ranges can be expressed herein as from“about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, some embodiments includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent“about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms some embodiments. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as“about” that particular value in addition to the value itself. For example, if the value“10” is disclosed, then“about 10” is also disclosed. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.
References in the specification and concluding claims to parts by weight of a particular element or component in a composition denotes the weight relationship between the element or component and any other elements or components in the composition or article for which a part by weight is expressed. Thus, in a compound containing 2 parts by weight of component X and 5 parts by weight component Y, X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.
A weight percent (wt. %) of a component, unless specifically stated to the contrary, is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included.
As used herein, the terms“optional” or“optionally” mean that the subsequently described event or circumstance can or cannot occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
As used herein, the term“subject” can be a vertebrate, such as a mammal, a fish, a bird, a reptile, or an amphibian. Thus, the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non-human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig, or rodent. The term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered. In one embodiment, the subject is a mammal. In another embodiment, the subject is a human. A patient refers to a subject afflicted with a viral infection. The term“patient” includes human and veterinary subjects. In some embodiments of the disclosed methods, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of one or more viral infections prior to the administering step. In various embodiments, the one or more disorders is selected from chikungunya, Venezuelan equine encephalitis, dengue, influenza, and zika.
As used herein, the term“treatment” refers to the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder. This term includes active treatment, that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder, and also includes causal treatment, that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. In addition, this term includes palliative treatment, that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder; preventative treatment, that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder; and supportive treatment, that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. In various embodiments, the term covers any treatment of a subject, including a mammal ( e.g ., a human), and includes: (i) preventing the disease from occurring in a subject that can be predisposed to the disease but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, i.e., arresting its development; or (iii) relieving the disease, i.e., causing regression of the disease. In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal such as a primate, and, in some embodiments, the subject is a human.
As used herein, the term“prevent” or“preventing” refers to precluding, averting, obviating, forestalling, stopping, or hindering something from happening, especially by advance action. It is understood that where reduce, inhibit, or prevent are used herein, unless specifically indicated otherwise, the use of the other two words is also expressly disclosed.
As used herein, the term“diagnosed” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by the compounds, compositions, or methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments of the disclosed methods, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a viral infection prior to the administering step. As used herein, the phrase “identified to be in need of treatment for a disorder,” or the like, refers to selection of a subject based upon need for treatment of the disorder. It is contemplated that the
identification can, in some embodiments, be performed by a person different from the person making the diagnosis. It is also contemplated, in some embodiments, that the administration can be performed by one who subsequently performed the administration.
As used herein, the terms“administering” and“administration” refer to any method of providing a pharmaceutical preparation to a subject. Such methods are well known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, oral administration, transdermal administration, administration by inhalation, nasal administration, topical administration, intravaginal administration, ophthalmic administration, intraaural administration,
intracerebral administration, rectal administration, and parenteral administration, including injectable such as intravenous administration, intra-arterial administration, intramuscular administration, and subcutaneous administration. Administration can be continuous or intermittent. In various embodiments, a preparation can be administered therapeutically; that is, administered to treat an existing disease or condition. In further various embodiments, a preparation can be administered prophylactically; that is, administered for prevention of a disease or condition.
The term“contacting” as used herein, in a biological context, refers to bringing a disclosed compound and a cell, target receptor, or other biological entity together in such a manner that the compound can affect the activity of the target ( e.g ., receptor, cell, etc.), either directly; i.e., by interacting with the target itself, or indirectly; i.e., by interacting with another molecule, co-factor, factor, or protein on which the activity of the target is dependent.
As used herein, the term“effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired result or to have an effect on an undesired condition. For example, a “therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired therapeutic result or to have an effect on undesired symptoms, but is generally insufficient to cause adverse side effects. The specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration; the route of administration; the rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed and like factors well known in the medical arts. For example, it is well within the skill of the art to start doses of a compound at levels lower than those required to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and to gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. If desired, the effective daily dose can be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration.
Consequently, single dose compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. The dosage can be adjusted by the individual physician in the event of any contraindications. Dosage can vary, and can be administered in one or more dose administrations daily, for one or several days. Guidance can be found in the literature for appropriate dosages for given classes of pharmaceutical products. In further various embodiments, a preparation can be administered in a“prophylactically effective amount”; that is, an effective amount for prevention of a disease or condition.
In some embodiments, such as in the case of oral or parenteral administration to adult humans weighing approximately 70 kg or more, a daily dosage of about 10 mg to about 10,000 mg, preferably from about 200 mg to about 1,000 mg, should be appropriate, although the upper limit may be exceeded. The daily dosage can be administered as a single dose or in divided doses, or for parenteral administration, as a continuous infusion.
Throughout this specification and the claims, the words“comprise,”“comprises,” and “comprising” are used in a non-exclusive sense, except where the context requires otherwise. It is understood that embodiments described herein include“consisting of’ and/or“consisting essentially of’ embodiments.
A compound of Formula I can be in the form of a“prodrug,” which includes compounds with moieties which can be metabolized in vivo. In other embodiments, a compound of Formula II can be in the form of a“prodrug.” Generally, the prodrugs are metabolized in vivo by esterases or by other mechanisms to active drugs. Examples of prodrugs and their uses are well known in the art (See, e.g., Berge et al. (1977)
“Pharmaceutical Salts”, J. Pharm. Sci. 66: 1-19). Preparations of such prodrug derivatives are discussed in various literature sources (examples are: Alexander et al., J. Med. Chem. 1988, 31, 318; Aligas-Martin et al., PCT WO 2000/041531, p. 30). The prodrugs can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form or hydroxyl with a suitable esterifying agent.
Hydroxyl groups can be converted into esters via treatment with a carboxylic acid. Examples of prodrug moieties include substituted and un substituted, branched or unbranched lower alkyl ester moieties, (e.g., propionoic acid esters), lower alkenyl esters, di-lower alkyl-amino lower-alkyl esters (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl ester), acylamino lower alkyl esters (e.g., acetyloxymethyl ester), acyloxy lower alkyl esters (e.g., pivaloyloxymethyl ester), aryl esters (phenyl ester), aryl-lower alkyl esters (e.g., benzyl ester), substituted (e.g., with methyl, halo, or methoxy substituents) aryl and aryl-lower alkyl esters, amides, lower-alkyl amides, di- lower alkyl amides, and hydroxy amides. Prodrugs which are converted to active forms through other mechanisms in vivo are also included. In embodiments, the compounds described herein are prodrugs of any of the formulae herein.
“Derivatives” of the compounds disclosed herein are pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, deuterated forms, radio-actively labeled forms, isomers, solvates and combinations thereof.
“Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refer to derivatives of the disclosed compounds wherein the parent compound is modified by making acid or base salts thereof. The compounds of this disclosure form acid addition salts with a wide variety of organic and inorganic acids and include the physiologically acceptable salts which are often used in pharmaceutical chemistry. Such salts are also part of this disclosure. Typical inorganic acids used to form such salts include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, nitric, sulfuric, phosphoric, hypophosphoric acid, and the like. Salts derived from organic acids, such as aliphatic mono- and dicarboxylic acids, phenyl substituted alkanoic acids, hydroxyalkanoic and hydroxyalkandioic acids, aromatic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfonic acids may also be used. Such pharmaceutically acceptable salts thus include acetate, phenylacetate, trifluoroacetate, acrylate, ascorbate, benzoate, chlorobenzoate, dinitrobenzoate,
hydroxybenzoate, methoxybenzoate, methylbenzoate, o-acetoxybenzoate, naphthalene-2 - benzoate, bromide, isobutyrate, phenylbutyrate, b-hydroxybutyrate, butyne-l,4-dioate, hexyne-l,4-dioate, caprate, caprylate, chloride, cinnamate, citrate, formate, fumarate, glycollate, heptanoate, hippurate, lactate, malate, maleate, hydroxymaleate, malonate, mandelate, mesylate, nicotinate, isonicotinate, nitrate, oxalate, phthalate, teraphthalate, phosphate, monohydrogenphosphate, dihydrogenphosphate, metaphosphate, pyrophosphate, propiolate, propionate, phenylpropionate, salicylate, sebacate, succinate, suberate, sulfate, bisulfate, pyrosulfate, sulfite, bisulfite, sulfonate, benzene-sulfonate, p- bromobenzenesulfonate, chlorobenzenesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, methanesulfonate, naphthalene- 1 -sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, / oleunesulfonate, xylenesulfonate, tartarate, and the like. As used herein, the term“substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In some embodiments, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, and aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described below. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this disclosure, the heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, can have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. This disclosure is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds. Also, the terms“substitution” or“substituted with” include the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g ., a compound that does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. It is also contemplated that, in certain embodiments, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e., further substituted or un substituted).
In defining various terms,“A1,”“A2,”“A3,” and“A4” are used herein as generic symbols to represent various specific substituents. These symbols can be any substituent, not limited to those disclosed herein, and when they are defined to be certain substituents in one instance, they can, in another instance, be defined as some other substituents.
The term“alkyl” as used herein is a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, isopropyl, «-butyl, isobutyl, s- butyl, /-butyl, «-pentyl, isopentyl, 5-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl, and the like. The alkyl group can also be substituted or unsubstituted. The alkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein. A“lower alkyl” group is an alkyl group containing from one to six (e.g., from one to four) carbon atoms.
Throughout the specification“alkyl” is generally used to refer to both unsubstituted alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups; however, substituted alkyl groups are also specifically referred to herein by identifying the specific substituent(s) on the alkyl group.
For example, the term“halogenated alkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halide, e.g. , fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. The term “alkoxyalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more alkoxy groups, as described below. The term“alkylamino” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more amino groups, as described below, and the like. When “alkyl” is used in one instance and a specific term such as“alkylalcohol” is used in another, it is not meant to imply that the term“alkyl” does not also refer to specific terms such as “alkylalcohol” and the like.
This practice is also used for other groups described herein. That is, while a term such as“cycloalkyl” refers to both unsubstituted and substituted cycloalkyl moieties, the substituted moieties can, in addition, be specifically identified herein; for example, a particular substituted cycloalkyl can be referred to as, e.g ., an“alkylcycloalkyl.” Similarly, a substituted alkoxy can be specifically referred to as, e.g. , a“halogenated alkoxy,” a particular substituted alkenyl can be, e.g. , an“alkenylalcohol,” and the like. Again, the practice of using a general term, such as“cycloalkyl,” and a specific term, such as“alkylcycloalkyl,” is not meant to imply that the general term does not also include the specific term.
The term“cycloalkyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring, which may be single or multi -cyclic, composed of at least three carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, norbomyl, and the like. Cycloalkyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some embodiments, cycloalkyl is C3-C8.
The term“heterocycloalkyl” as used herein refers to single and multi-cyclic non aromatic ring systems in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon.
Heterocycloalkyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C2-C9, C2-C8, C2-C7, C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyl is C2-C7. Non-limiting examples of heterocycloalkyl groups include piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, azetidine, tetrahydropyran, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and the like.
The cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
The term“alkoxy” refers to an -O-alkyl or -O-cycloalkyl radical bonded through an ether linkage. Alkoxy groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents. The term“haloalkoxy” refers to an -O-alkyl group that is substituted by one or more halo substituents. Examples of haloalkoxy groups include trifluoromethoxy, and 2,2,2- trifluoroethoxy.
The term“alkenyl” as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
Asymmetric structures such as (A1A2)C=C(A3A4) are intended to include both the E and Z isomers. This can be presumed in structural formulae herein wherein an asymmetric alkene is present, or it can be explicitly indicated by the bond symbol C=C. The alkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
The term“cycloalkenyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least three carbon atoms and containing at least one carbon-carbon double bound, i.e., C=C. Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl,
cyclohexadienyl, norbomenyl, and the like. Cycloalkenyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some embodiments, cycloalkenyl is C3-C8.
The term“heterocycloalkenyl” is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring containing at least one carbon-carbon double bound, i.e., C=C, where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. Heterocycloalkenyl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C6, C4-C6, C5-C6, C3-C8, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some
embodiments, heterocycloalkenyl is C3-C8.
The cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
The term“alkynyl” as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. The alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
The term“aryl” as used herein is a single or multi-cyclic group that contains any carbon-based aromatic group including, but not limited to, benzene, naphthalene, phenyl, biphenyl, phenoxybenzene, and the like. The term“biaryl” is a specific type of aryl group and is included in the definition of“aryl.” Biaryl refers to two aryl groups that are bound together via a fused ring structure, as in naphthalene, or are attached via one or more carbon- carbon bonds, as in biphenyl.
The term“heteroaryl” as used herein is a single or multi-cyclic group that contains any aromatic group that has at least one heteroatom incorporated within the ring of the aromatic group. Examples of heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and phosphorus. The heteroaryl can include any number of carbons, non-limiting examples of which are C3-C9, C3-C8, C3-C7, C3-C6, C3-C5, C3-C4, C4-C5, C4-C6, C5-C6, C4-C8, C5-C8, and C6-C8. In some embodiments, heteroaryl is C4-C5. Non-limiting examples of such heteroaryl groups include imidazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, pyridazyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, quinoxolyl, pyranyl, pyrimidinyl, furyl, thienyl, triazolyl, thiazolyl, carbolinyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thiamorpholinyl sulfone, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, oxopiperidinyl,
oxopyrrolidinyl, oxoazepinyl, azepinyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, furazanyl, thiadiazyl, oxathiolyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, and benzocinnolinyl, and the like.
The aryl or heteroaryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The aryl or heteroaryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
The term“aldehyde” as used herein is represented by the formula— C(0)H.
Throughout this specification“C(O)” is a short hand notation for a carbonyl group, /. e. , C=0.
The terms“amine” or“amino” as used herein are represented by the formula—
NA1 A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, hydrogen or alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
The term“alkylamino” as used herein is represented by the formula— NH(-alkyl) where alkyl is a described herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, isopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, (sec-butyl)amino group, (tert-butyl)amino group, pentylamino group, isopentylamino group, (tert-pentyl)amino group, hexylamino group, and the like.
The term“dialkylamino” as used herein is represented by the formula— N(-alkyl)2 where alkyl is a described herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, dibutylamino group, diisobutylamino group, di(sec-butyl)amino group, di(tert-butyl)amino group, dipentylamino group, diisopentylamino group, di(tert-pentyl)amino group, dihexylamino group, N-ethyl-N-methylamino group, N-methyl-N-propylamino group, N- ethyl-N-propylamino group and the like.
The term“carboxylic acid” as used herein is represented by the formula— C(0)0H.
The term“ester” as used herein is represented by the formula— 0C(0)A1 or— C(0)0A1, where A1 can be an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term“polyester” as used herein is represented by the formula— (A10(0)C-A2-C(0)0)a— or— (A10(0)C-A2- 0C(0))a— , where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer from 1 to 500. “Polyester” is as the term used to describe a group that is produced by the reaction between a compound having at least two carboxylic acid groups with a compound having at least two hydroxyl groups.
The term“ether” as used herein is represented by the formula A'OA2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein. The term“polyether” as used herein is represented by the formula— (A10-A20)a— , where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer of from 1 to 500. Examples of polyether groups include polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide, and polybutylene oxide.
The term“halide” as used herein refers to the halogens fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
The term“hydroxyl” as used herein is represented by the formula— OH. The term“ketone” as used herein is represented by the formula A1C(0)A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl,
cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
The term“azide” as used herein is represented by the formula— N3.
The term“nitro” as used herein is represented by the formula— NO?.
The term“nitrile” as used herein is represented by the formula— CN.
The term“silyl” as used herein is represented by the formula— SiA1A2A3, where A1, A2, and A3 can be, independently, hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
The term“sulfo-oxo” as used herein is represented by the formulas— S(0)A',— S(0)2A1, — 0S(0)2A1, or— 0S(0)20A1, where A1 can be hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. Throughout this specification“S(O)” is a short hand notation for S=0. The term“sulfonyl” is used herein to refer to the sulfo-oxo group represented by the formula— S(0)?A', where A1 can be hydrogen or an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term“sulfone” as used herein is represented by the formula A ' S(0)?A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term“sulfoxide” as used herein is represented by the formula A' S(0)A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
The term“thiol” as used herein is represented by the formula— SH.
“R1,”“R2,”“R3,”“Rn,” where n is an integer, as used herein can, independently, possess one or more of the groups listed above. For example, if R1 is a straight chain alkyl group, one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group can optionally be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a halide, and the like. Depending upon the groups that are selected, a first group can be incorporated within second group or,
alternatively, the first group can be pendant (i.e., attached) to the second group. For example, with the phrase“an alkyl group comprising an amino group,” the amino group can be incorporated within the backbone of the alkyl group. Alternatively, the amino group can be attached to the backbone of the alkyl group. The nature of the group(s) that is (are) selected will determine if the first group is embedded or attached to the second group.
As described herein, compounds of the subject matter described herein may contain “optionally substituted” moieties. In general, the term“substituted,” whether preceded by the term“optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an“optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. Combinations of substituents envisioned by the subject matter described herein are those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. In is also contemplated that, in certain embodiments, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e., further substituted or unsubstituted).
The term“stable,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain embodiments, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
Suitable monovalent substituents on a substitutable carbon atom of an“optionally substituted” group are independently halogen; -(CH2)o-4R°; -(CH2)o-40R°; -0(CH2)o-4R°, - 0-(CH2)O^C(0)OR°; -(CH2)O-4CH(OR°)2; -(CH2)O-4SR°; -(CH2)0-4Ph, which may be substituted with R°; -(CH2)o-40(CH2)o-iPh which may be substituted with R°; -CH=CHPh, which may be substituted with R°; -(CH2)o^O(CH2)o-i-pyridyl which may be substituted with R°; -N02; -CN; -N3; -(CH2> N(R°)2; -(CH2)O-4N(R0)C(0)R0; -N(R°)C(S)R°; - (CH2)O^N(R°)C(0)NR°2; -N(R°)C(S)NR°2; -(CH2)O-4N(R0)C(0)OR0; - N(R°)N(R°)C(0)R°; -N(R°)N(R°)C(0)NR°2; -N(R°)N(R°)C(0)0R°; -(CH2)0-4C(O)R°; - C(S)R°; -(CH2> C(0)0R°; -(CH2)( C(0)SR°; -(CH2)o-4C(0)OSiR°3; -(CH2)0-4OC(O)Ro; -OC(0)(CH2)O-4SR-, SC(S)SR°; -(CH2> SC(0)R°; -(CH2)O-4C(0)NR°2; -C(S)NR°2; - C(S)SR°; -SC(S)SR°, -(CH2)0-4OC(O)NRo 2; -C(0)N(0R°)R°; -C(0)C(0)R°; - C(0)CH2C(0)R°; -C(NOR°)R°; -(CH2), SSR°; -(CH2), S(0)2R°; -(CH2)0-4S(O)2ORo; - (CH2)O^OS(0)2R°; -S(0)2NR°2; -(CH2)O-4S(0)R°; -N(R°)S(0)2NR°2; -N(R°)S(0)2R°; - N(OR°)R°; -C(NH)NR°2; -P(0)2R°; -P(0)R°2; -0P(0)R°2; -0P(0)(0R°)2; SiR°3; -(Ci^ straight or branched alkylene)0-N(R°)2; or -(C 1-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(0)0- N(R°)2, wherein each R° may be substituted as defined below and is independently hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o-iPh, -CH2-(5-6 membered heteroaryl ring), or a 5-6- membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R°, taken together with their intervening atom(s), form a 3—12— membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, which may be substituted as defined below.
Suitable monovalent substituents on R° (or the ring formed by taking two independent occurrences of R° together with their intervening atoms), are independently halogen, - (CH2)O-2R·, -(haloR*), -(CH2)0-2OH, -(CH2)o-2ORe, -(CH2)0-2CH(OR*)2; -0(haloR*), -CN, -Ns, -(CH2)O-2C(0)R·, -(CH2)O-2C(0)OH, -(CH2)O-2C(0)OR·, -(CH2)o-2SRe, -(CH2)O-2SH, -(CH2)O-2NH2, -(CH2)O-2NHR·, -(CH2)O-2NR*2, -N02, -SiR’s, -OSiR’s, -C(0)SR* -(Ci^ straight or branched alkylene)C(0)OR*, or -SSR* wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently selected from C1-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o-iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of R° include =0 and =S.
Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of an“optionally
substituted” group include the following: =0, =S, =NNR* 2, =NNHC(0)R*, =NNHC(0)OR*, =NNHS(0)2R*, =NR*, =NOR*, -0(C(R* 2))2-30-, or -S(C(R* 2))2-3S-, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an“optionally substituted” group include: -0(CR* 2)2-30-, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R* include halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)OH, -C(0)OR*, -NH2, NHR*, -NR*2, or -N02, wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o-iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an“optionally substituted” group include -R, -NR 2, -C(0)R, -C(0)OR, -C(0)C(0)R, -C(0)CH2C(0)R, - S(0)2R, -S(0)2NR 2, -C(S)NR 2, -C(NH)NR 2, or -N(R)S(0)2R; wherein each R is independently hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted -OPh, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R, taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3-l2-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R are independently halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)OH, -C(0)OR*, -NH2, NHR*, -NR*2, or -N02, wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o-iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
The term“organic residue” defines a carbon containing residue, i.e., a residue comprising at least one carbon atom, and includes but is not limited to the carbon-containing groups, residues, or radicals defined hereinabove. Organic residues can contain various heteroatoms, or be bonded to another molecule through a heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or the like. Examples of organic residues include but are not limited alkyl or substituted alkyls, alkoxy or substituted alkoxy, mono or di- substituted amino, amide groups, etc. Organic residues can preferably comprise 1 to 18 carbon atoms, 1 to 15, carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, an organic residue can comprise 2 to 18 carbon atoms, 2 to 15, carbon atoms, 2 to 12 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms
A very close synonym of the term“residue” is the term“radical,” which as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to a fragment, group, or substructure of a molecule described herein, regardless of how the molecule is prepared. For example, a 2,4- thiazolidinedione radical in a particular compound has the structure:
Figure imgf000020_0001
regardless of whether thiazolidinedione is used to prepare the compound. In some embodiments the radical (for example an alkyl) can be further modified (i.e., substituted alkyl) by having bonded thereto one or more“substituent radicals.” The number of atoms in a given radical is not critical to the presently described subject matter unless it is indicated to the contrary elsewhere herein.
“Organic radicals,” as the term is defined and used herein, contain one or more carbon atoms. An organic radical can have, for example, 1-26 carbon atoms, 1-18 carbon atoms, 1- 12 carbon atoms, 1-8 carbon atoms, 1-6 carbon atoms, or 1-4 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, an organic radical can have 2-26 carbon atoms, 2-18 carbon atoms, 2-12 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbon atoms, or 2-4 carbon atoms. Organic radicals often have hydrogen bound to at least some of the carbon atoms of the organic radical. One example, of an organic radical that comprises no inorganic atoms is a 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydro-2- naphthyl radical. In some embodiments, an organic radical can contain 1-10 inorganic heteroatoms bound thereto or therein, including halogens, oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, and the like. Examples of organic radicals include but are not limited to an alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, mono-substituted amino, di- substituted amino, acyloxy, cyano, carboxy, carboalkoxy, alkylcarboxamide, substituted alkylcarboxamide, dialkylcarboxamide, substituted dialkylcarboxamide, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfmyl, thioalkyl, thiohaloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, or substituted heterocyclic radicals, wherein the terms are defined elsewhere herein. A few non-limiting examples of organic radicals that include heteroatoms include alkoxy radicals, trifluoromethoxy radicals, acetoxy radicals, dimethylamino radicals and the like.
“Inorganic radicals,” as the term is defined and used herein, contain no carbon atoms and therefore comprise only atoms other than carbon. Inorganic radicals comprise bonded combinations of atoms selected from hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, and halogens such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, which can be present individually or bonded together in their chemically stable combinations. Inorganic radicals have 10 or fewer, or preferably one to six or one to four inorganic atoms as listed above bonded together. Examples of inorganic radicals include, but not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halogens, nitro, thiol, sulfate, phosphate, and like commonly known inorganic radicals. The inorganic radicals do not have bonded therein the metallic elements of the periodic table (such as the alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, transition metals, lanthanide metals, or actinide metals), although such metal ions can sometimes serve as a pharmaceutically acceptable cation for anionic inorganic radicals such as a sulfate, phosphate, or like anionic inorganic radical. Inorganic radicals do not comprise metalloids elements such as boron, aluminum, gallium, germanium, arsenic, tin, lead, or tellurium, or the noble gas elements, unless otherwise specifically indicated elsewhere herein.
Compounds described herein can contain one or more double bonds and, thus, potentially give rise to cis/trans (E/Z) isomers, as well as other conformational isomers.
ETnless stated to the contrary, the subject matter described herein includes all such possible isomers, as well as mixtures of such isomers.
ETnless stated to the contrary, a formula with chemical bonds shown only as solid lines and not as wedges or dashed lines contemplates each possible isomer, e.g ., each enantiomer and diastereomer, and a mixture of isomers, such as a racemic or scalemic mixture.
Compounds described herein can contain one or more asymmetric centers and, thus, potentially give rise to diastereomers and optical isomers. ETnless stated to the contrary, the presently described subject matter includes all such possible diastereomers as well as their racemic mixtures, their substantially pure resolved enantiomers, all possible geometric isomers, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Mixtures of stereoisomers, as well as isolated specific stereoisomers, are also included. During the course of the synthetic procedures used to prepare such compounds, or in using racemization or epimerization procedures known to those skilled in the art, the products of such procedures can be a mixture of stereoisomers.
Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms having the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1 or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (-) or meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these compounds, called stereoisomers, are identical except that they are non- superimposable mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture. Many of the compounds described herein can have one or more chiral centers and therefore can exist in different enantiomeric forms. If desired, a chiral carbon can be designated with an asterisk (*). When bonds to the chiral carbon are depicted as straight lines in the disclosed formulas, it is understood that both the (R) and (S) configurations of the chiral carbon, and hence both enantiomers and mixtures thereof, are embraced within the formula. As is used in the art, when it is desired to specify the absolute configuration about a chiral carbon, one of the bonds to the chiral carbon can be depicted as a wedge (bonds to atoms above the plane) and the other can be depicted as a series or wedge of short parallel lines is (bonds to atoms below the plane). The Cahn-Inglod-Prelog system can be used to assign the (R) or (S) configuration to a chiral carbon.
When the disclosed compounds contain one chiral center, the compounds exist in two enantiomeric forms. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, a disclosed compound includes both enantiomers and mixtures of enantiomers, such as the specific 50:50 mixture referred to as a racemic mixture. The enantiomers can be resolved by methods known to those skilled in the art, such as formation of diastereoisomeric salts which may be separated, for example, by crystallization (see, CRC Handbook of Optical Resolutions via
Diastereomeric Salt Formation by David Kozma (CRC Press, 2001)); formation of diastereoisomeric derivatives or complexes which may be separated, for example, by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography; selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specific reagent, for example enzymatic esterification; or gas-liquid or liquid chromatography in a chiral environment, for example on a chiral support for example silica with a bound chiral ligand or in the presence of a chiral solvent. It will be appreciated that where the desired enantiomer is converted into another chemical entity by one of the separation procedures described above, a further step can liberate the desired enantiomeric form. Alternatively, specific enantiomers can be synthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer into the other by asymmetric transformation.
Designation of a specific absolute configuration at a chiral carbon in a disclosed compound is understood to mean that the designated enantiomeric form of the compounds can be provided in enantiomeric excess (e.e.). Enantiomeric excess, as used herein, is the presence of a particular enantiomer at greater than 50%, for example, greater than 60%, greater than 70%, greater than 75%, greater than 80%, greater than 85%, greater than 90%, greater than 95%, greater than 98%, or greater than 99%. In some embodiments, the designated enantiomer is substantially free from the other enantiomer. For example, the“R” forms of the compounds can be substantially free from the“S” forms of the compounds and are, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the“S” forms. Conversely,“S” forms of the compounds can be substantially free of“R” forms of the compounds and are, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the“R” forms.
When a disclosed compound has two or more chiral carbons, it can have more than two optical isomers and can exist in diastereoisomeric forms. For example, when there are two chiral carbons, the compound can have up to four optical isomers and two pairs of enantiomers ((S,S)/(R,R) and (R,S)/(S,R)). The pairs of enantiomers (e.g., (S,S)/(R,R)) are mirror image stereoisomers of one another. The stereoisomers that are not mirror-images (e.g., (S,S) and (R,S)) are diastereomers. The diastereoisomeric pairs can be separated by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example chromatography or crystallization and the individual enantiomers within each pair may be separated as described above. Unless otherwise specifically excluded, a disclosed compound includes each diastereoisomer of such compounds and mixtures thereof.
In some embodiments, a compound may have two chiral carbons on a cycloalkyl ring, such as a cyclohexyl ring. In this case, the substituents on the chiral carbons may be labeled as in the“cis” or“trans” configuration. For example, the substituents on the cyclohexyl may, in some embodiments, labeled as such:
Figure imgf000023_0001
cis cis trans trans
Compounds described herein comprise atoms in both their natural isotopic abundance and in non-natural abundance. The disclosed compounds can be isotopically-labeled or isotopically-substituted compounds identical to those described, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number typically found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the subject matter described herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, ¾, 13C, 14C, 15N, 180, 170, 35S, 18F and 36Cl, respectively. Compounds further comprise prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of said compounds or of said prodrugs which contain the aforementioned isotopes and/or other isotopes of other atoms are within the scope of the subject matter described herein. Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of the presently described subject matter, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3H and 14C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated, i.e., ¾, and carbon-l4, i.e., 14C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., 2H, can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances. Isotopically labeled compounds of the presently described subject matter and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non- isotopically labeled reagent.
The compounds described herein can be present as a solvate. A“solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of Formula I. In other embodiments, a“solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of Formula I. Examples of solvents that form solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine. The term“hydrate” refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water. Unless stated to the contrary, the subject matter described herein includes all such possible solvates.
It is known that chemical substances form solids which are present in different states of order which are termed polymorphic forms or modifications. The different modifications of a polymorphic substance can differ greatly in their physical properties. The compounds according to the subject matter described herein can be present in different polymorphic forms, with it being possible for particular modifications to be metastable. Unless stated to the contrary, the subject matter described herein includes all such possible polymorphic forms.
Certain materials, compounds, compositions, and components disclosed herein can be obtained commercially or readily synthesized using techniques generally known to those of skill in the art. For example, the starting materials and reagents used in preparing the disclosed compounds and compositions are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wis.), Acros Organics (Morris Plains, N.J.), Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.), or Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.) or are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser’s Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-17 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd’s Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and Supplementals (Elsevier Science
Publishers, 1989); Organic Reactions, Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry, (John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition); and Larock’s
Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989).
Other definitions are provided elsewhere herein.
B. COMPOUNDS
The compounds disclosed herein are compounds of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, metabolites, or derivatives thereof. These compounds are useful inhibitors of one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase. In embodiments, Formula I has the following general structure:
I
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein,
Cy1 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl and C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
Rlais selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4)
dialkylamino;
In other embodiments, Rlais selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000025_0002
Cy2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
In other embodiments, Cy2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl,
C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000026_0001
selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy2, and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein
Cy2 is as defined above;
In other embodiments, Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy2, and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000026_0002
Cya is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
R2 is selected from hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, -C(0)R20, -C(0)N(R22)R2°, -N(R22)C(0)R2°, - S02N(R22)R21, -N(R22)S02R21, -S02R21, and -(CH2)nCy3; wherein
n is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R20 and R21 is each independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)qOR30, and -(CH2)qCy4; wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R30 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy4 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and (C1-C4 alkyl )NR40aR40b; wherein
R20 is as defined above;
R40a and R40b is each independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R22 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy3 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, , -C(0)R2°, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein
R20 is as defined above;
R3 is selected from -(CH2)pOH and -(CH2)PNHR23; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2; and
R23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
In other embodiments, R3 is selected from -(CH2)pOH, -(CH2)PNHR23, and -NR23R24;
wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2; and
R23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R24 is -(CH2)qCy5;
wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
Cy5 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, - NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; and
X is -NR50- or -(CH2)tNR50-; wherein
t is selected from 1 and 2; and
R50 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Cy1 is optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl. As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted piperidine.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the optionally substituted piperidine has the structure:
Figure imgf000028_0001
wherein the wavy lines denote points of attachment.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rla is hydrogen.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl and Cy2.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is C1-C8 alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is C3-C5 alkyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is
Figure imgf000028_0002
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is Cy2.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Cy2 is aryl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the aryl is optionally substituted phenyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the optionally substituted phenyl is optionally substituted with halogen or
Figure imgf000028_0003
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with
Figure imgf000028_0004
, wherein Cya is aryl or C3-C9 heteroaryl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with halogen.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the optionally substituted phenyl is:
Figure imgf000029_0001
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of-C(0)R20, -(CH2)nCy3, and -SO2R21.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein R2 is -(CH2)nCy3.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein n is 1 and Cy3 is C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the C3-C8 cycloalkyl is
cyclopentyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein R3 is -(CH2)pOH; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein p is 0.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein X is -NH-.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the substituents on the carbons marked“a” and“b” are in a trans configuration.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound has a structure:
Figure imgf000029_0002
wherein Rlb and R2 are defined as herein.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000029_0003
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure imgf000032_0001
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000032_0002
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
Figure imgf000035_0001

Figure imgf000036_0001

Figure imgf000037_0001
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound is:
Figure imgf000037_0002
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000037_0003
Figure imgf000038_0001
In other embodiments, the compounds disclosed herein are compounds of Formula II or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, metabolites, or derivatives thereof. These compounds are useful inhibitors of one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase. In embodiments, Formula II has the following general structure:
II
Figure imgf000038_0002
wherein,
Cy1 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl and C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
Rlais selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000039_0001
Cy2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl,
C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000039_0002
Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy2, and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000039_0003
; wherein
Cy2 is as defined above;
Cya is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
R2 is selected from hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, -C(0)R20, -C(0)N(R22)R2°, -N(R22)C(0)R2°, - S02N(R22)R21, -N(R22)S02R21, -S02R21, and -(CH2)nCy3; wherein
n is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R20 and R21 is each independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)qOR30, and - (CH2)qCy4; wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R30 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy4 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and
C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and (C1-C4 alkyl )NR40aR40b; wherein R20 is as defined above;
R40a and R40b is each independently selected from hydrogen and Cl-
C4 alkyl; R22 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy3 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, , -C(0)R20, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein R20 is as defined above;
R3 is selected from -(CH2)pOH, -(CH2)PNHR23, and -NR23R24; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2; and
R23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R24 is -(CH2)qCy5;
wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
Cy5 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; and
X is -NR50- or -(CH2)tNR50-; wherein
t is selected from 1 and 2; and
R50 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Cy1 is optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein said optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted piperidine.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rla is hydrogen.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl and
Cy2.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Rlb is Cy2.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein Cy2 is aryl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein said aryl is optionally substituted phenyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with halogen. As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is:
Figure imgf000041_0001
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein R2 is hydrogen or C1-C4 alkyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein said C1-C4 alkyl is methyl.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein R3 is -(CH2)pOH; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein p is 0.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein X is -NH-.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the substituents on the carbons marked “a” and“b” are in a trans configuration.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound has a structure:
Figure imgf000041_0002
wherein Rlb and R2 are defined as herein.
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound is
Figure imgf000041_0003
As in any embodiment above, a compound wherein the compound i
Figure imgf000041_0004
C. PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS In some embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In other embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound of Formula II and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutical composition can be provided comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one disclosed compound. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutical composition can be provided comprising a prophylactically effective amount of at least one disclosed compound. In some embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound, wherein the compound is present in an effective amount.
Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds are conventional acid-addition salts or base-addition salts that retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the compounds and are formed from suitable non-toxic organic or inorganic acids or organic or inorganic bases. Exemplary acid-addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid, phosphoric acid and nitric acid, and those derived from organic acids such as p- toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, malic acid, lactic acid, fumaric acid, and the like. Example base-addition salts include those derived from ammonium, potassium, sodium and, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, such as for example, tetram ethyl ammonium hydroxide. Chemical modification of a pharmaceutical compound into a salt is a known technique to obtain improved physical and chemical stability, hygroscopicity, flowability and solubility of compounds. See, e.g., H. Ansel et. ak, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems (6th Ed. 1995) at pp. 196 and 1456-1457.
The pharmaceutical compositions comprise the compounds in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier refers to sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use. Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol and the like), carboxymethylcellulose and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. The compounds can be formulated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or diluents as well as any other known adjuvants and excipients in accordance with conventional techniques such as those disclosed in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, l9th Edition, Gennaro, Ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1995.
In various embodiments, the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions comprise the disclosed compounds (including pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and, optionally, other therapeutic ingredients or adjuvants. The instant compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous)
administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the particular host, and nature and severity of the conditions for which the active ingredient is being administered. The pharmaceutical compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
The choice of carrier will be determined in part by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of the pharmaceutical composition of the presently described subject matter. The following formulations for oral, aerosol, parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraarterial,
intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, rectal, and vaginal administration are merely exemplary and are in no way limiting.
Formulations suitable for oral administration can consist of (a) liquid solutions, such as an effective amount of the compound dissolved in diluents, such as water, saline, or orange juice; (b) capsules, sachets, tablets, lozenges, and troches, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, as solids or granule; (c) powders; (d) suspensions in an appropriate liquid; and (e) suitable emulsions. Liquid formulations may include diluents, such as water, cyclodextrin, dimethyl sulfoxide and alcohols, for example, ethanol, benzyl alcohol, propylene glycol, glycerin, and the polyethylene alcohols including polyethylene glycol, either with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, suspending agent, or emulsifying agent. Capsule forms can be of the ordinary hard-or soft-shelled gelatin type containing, for example, surfactants, lubricants, and inert fillers, such as lactose, sucrose, calcium phosphate, and corn starch. Tablet forms can include one or more of the following: lactose, sucrose, mannitol, corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid, microcrystalline cellulose, acacia, gelatin, guar gum, colloidal silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, talc, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, stearic acid, and other excipients, colorants, diluents, buffering agents, disintegrating agents, moistening agents, preservatives, flavoring agents, and pharmacologically compatible carriers. Lozenge forms can comprise the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth, as well as pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acadia, emulsions, and gels containing, the addition to the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acadia, emulsions, and gels containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art.
The compounds of the present disclosure alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be made into aerosol formulations to be administered via inhalation. These aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, and nitrogen. They also may be formulated as
pharmaceuticals for non-pressured preparations, such as in a nebulizer or an atomizer.
Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous, isotonic sterile injection solutions, which can contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives. The compound can be administered in a physiologically acceptable diluent in a pharmaceutical carrier, such as a sterile liquid or mixture of liquids, including water, saline, aqueous dextrose and related sugar solutions, an alcohol, such as ethanol, isopropanol, or hexadecyl alcohol, glycols, such as propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol such as poly(ethyleneglycol) 400, glycerol ketals, such as 2,2- dimethyl- 1, 3-dioxolane-4-methanol, ethers, an oil, a fatty acid, a fatty acid ester or glyceride, or an acetylated fatty acid glyceride with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, such as a soap or a detergent, suspending agent, such as pectin, carbomers, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, or carboxymethylcelluslose, or emulsifying agents and other pharmaceutical adjuvants.
Oils which can be used in parenteral formulations include petroleum, animal, vegetable, or synthetic oils. Specific examples of oils include peanut, soybean, sesame, cottonseed, com, olive, petrolatum, and mineral. Suitable fatty acids for use in parenteral formulations include oleic acid, stearic acid, and isostearic acid. Ethyl oleate and isopropyl myristate are examples of suitable fatty acid esters. Suitable soaps for use in parenteral formulations include fatty alkali metal, ammonium, and triethanolamine salts, and suitable detergents include (a) cationic detergents such as, for example dimethyldialkylammonium halides, and alkylpyridinium halides, (b) anionic detergents such as, for example, alkyl, aryl, and olefin sulfonates, alkyl olefin, ether, and monoglyceride sulfates, and sulfosuccinates, (c) nonionic detergents such as, for example, fatty amine oxides, fatty acid alkanolamides, and polyoxyethylene polypropylene copolymers, (d) amphoteric detergents such as, for example, alkyl b-aminopropionates, and 2-alkylimidazoline quaternary ammonium salts, and (e) mixtures thereof.
The parenteral formulations typically contain from about 0.5% to about 25% by weight of the active ingredient in solution. Suitable preservatives and buffers can be used in such formulations. In order to minimize or eliminate irritation at the site of injection, such compositions may contain one or more nonionic surfactants having a hydrophile-lipophile balance (HLB) of from about 12 to about 17. The quantity of surfactant in such formulations ranges from about 5% to about 15% by weight. Suitable surfactants include polyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as sorbitan monooleate and the high molecular weight adducts of ethylene oxide with a hydrophobic base, formed by the condensation of propylene oxide with propylene glycol.
Pharmaceutically acceptable excipients are also well-known to those who are skilled in the art. The choice of excipient will be determined in part by the particular compound, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of the pharmaceutical composition of the present disclosure. The following methods and excipients are merely exemplary and are in no way limiting. The pharmaceutically acceptable excipients preferably do not interfere with the action of the active ingredients and do not cause adverse side-effects. Suitable carriers and excipients include solvents such as water, alcohol, and propylene glycol, solid absorbants and diluents, surface active agents, suspending agent, tableting binders, lubricants, flavors, and coloring agents.
The formulations can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid excipient, for example, water, for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets. The requirements for effective pharmaceutical carriers for injectable compositions are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. See Pharmaceutics and Pharmacy Practice , J.B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia, PA, Banker and Chalmers, Eds., 238-250 (1982) and ASHP Handbook on Injectable Drugs , Toissel, 4th ed., 622-630 (1986).
Formulations suitable for topical administration include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier; as well as creams, emulsions, and gels containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art.
Additionally, formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as suppositories by mixing with a variety of bases such as emulsifying bases or water-soluble bases. Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, or spray formulas containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
One skilled in the art will appreciate that suitable methods of exogenously
administering a compound of the present disclosure to an animal are available, and, although more than one route can be used to administer a particular compound, a particular route can provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.
As regards these applications, the present methods include the administration to an animal, particularly a mammal, and more particularly a human, of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound effective in the inhibition of one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I administered to an animal is a Mer tyrosine kinase selective inhibitor. The methods also include the administration of a therapeutically effect amount of the compound for the treatment of patient having a predisposition for being afflicted by a disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction, or an infectious disease. In some embodiments, the patient is afflicted by a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase. The dose administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the presently described subject matter should be sufficient to affect a therapeutic response in the animal over a reasonable time frame. One skilled in the art will recognize that dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the condition of the animal, the body weight of the animal, as well as the severity and stage of the disorder or infectious disease.
The total amount of the compound of the present disclosure administered in a typical treatment is preferably between about 10 mg/kg and about 1000 mg/kg of body weight for mice, and between about 100 mg/kg and about 500 mg/kg of body weight, and more preferably between 200 mg/kg and about 400 mg/kg of body weight for humans per daily dose. This total amount is typically, but not necessarily, administered as a series of smaller doses over a period of about one time per day to about three times per day for about 24 months, and preferably over a period of twice per day for about 12 months.
In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host by administering a daily amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the present invention, which may be provided in dosages once or more a day. In one embodiment, the Mer TKI dose is between about .5 mg and about 200 mg. In one embodiment, the dose is at least about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5mg, about 10 mg, about 12 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 110 mg, about 125 mg, about 140 mg, about 150, about 175, or about 200 mg. In another embodiment, the dose is between about 200 mg and 1250 mg. In one embodiment, the dose is about 200 mg, about 225 mg, about 250 mg, about 275 mg, about 300 mg, about 325 mg, about 350 mg, about 375 mg, about 400 mg, about 425 mg, about 450 mg, about 475 mg, about 500 mg, about 525 mg, about 550 mg, about 575 mg, about 600 mg, about 625 mg, about 650 mg, about 675 mg, about 700 mg, about 725 mg, about 750 mg, about 775 mg, about 800 mg, about 825 mg, about 850 mg, about 875 mg, about 900 mg, about 925 mg, about 950 mg, about 975 mg, about 1000 mg or more.
In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are combined with an additional anti-tumor agent, anti -neoplastic agent, anti -cancer agent, immunomodulatory agent, immunostimulatory agent, anti-infective agents, anti -thrombotic, and/or anti-clotting agent. The dosage administered to the host can be similar to that as administered during monotherapy treatment, or may be lower, for example, between about 0.5 mg and about 150 mg. In one embodiment, the dose is at least about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5mg, about 10 mg, about 12 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 110 mg, about 125 mg, about 140 mg, or about 150 mg.
In some embodiments, for the case of the co-administration of an active compound in combination with an additional anti-tumor agent, anti -neoplastic agent, anti-cancer agent, immunomodulatory agent, immunostimulatory agent, anti -infective agents, anti -thrombotic, and/or anti-clotting agent, as otherwise described herein, the amount of the compound of Formula I to be administered ranges from about 0.01 mg/kg of the patient to about 50 mg/kg or more of the patient or considerably more, depending upon the second compound to be co- administered, the condition of the patient, severity of the disease to be treated, and the route of administration. In one embodiment, the additional anti-tumor agent, anti -neoplastic agent, anti-cancer agent, immunomodulatory agent, immunostimulatory agent, anti -infective agents, anti -thrombotic, and/or anti -clotting agent may, for example, be administered in amounts ranging from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg. In one embodiment, for oral dosing, suitable daily dosages are, for example, between about 0.1-4000 mg administered orally once-daily, twice-daily, or three times-daily, continuous (every day) or intermittently (e.g., 3- 5 days a week).
The size of the dose also will be determined by the route, timing and frequency of administration as well as the existence, nature and extent of any adverse side effects that might accompany the administration of the compound and the desired physiological effect. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that various conditions or disease states, in particular chronic conditions or disease states, may require prolonged treatment involving multiple administrations.
In some embodiments, the composition further comprises at least one or more of an agent known to treat a viral infection, a bacterial infection, a thrombotic disorder or a clotting disorder, or a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation. The agents are described in detail herein.
D. METHODS OF MAKING THE COMPOUNDS
In some embodiments, disclosed are methods of making a compound of Formula I. In other embodiments, disclosed are methods of making a compound of Formula II.
Compounds according to the present disclosure can, for example, be prepared by the methods described herein. A practitioner skilled in the art will understand the appropriate use of protecting groups [see: Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis ] and the preparation of known compounds found in the literature using the standard methods of organic synthesis. There may come from time to time the need to rearrange the order of the recommended synthetic steps, however this will be apparent to the judgment of a chemist skilled in the art of organic synthesis. The following examples are provided so that the subject matter described herein might be more fully understood, are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limiting. In some embodiments, the disclosed compounds comprise the products of the synthetic methods described herein. In some embodiments, the disclosed compounds comprise a compound produced by a synthetic method described herein. In some
embodiments, the subject matter described herein comprises a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of the product of the disclosed methods and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In some embodiments, the subject matter described herein comprises a method for manufacturing a medicament comprising combining at least one compound of any of disclosed compounds or at least one product of the disclosed methods with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
E. METHODS OF USING THE COMPOUNDS
The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the subject matter described herein are useful in treating or controlling a variety of disorders including, but not limited to, disorders of uncontrolled cellular proliferation such as, for example, cancer, infections such as, for example, a viral infection and a bacterial infection, and thrombotic disorders.
As described in more detail herein, ligand-bound MerTK can complex with phosphatidyl serine and bind apoptotic cells, which triggers ingestion and suppression of inflammatory cytokines. It is aberrantly expressed in certain cancers (e.g., acute leukemia (ALL and AML)) and some solid tumors (e.g., breast cancer, colon cancer, non-small cell lung carcinoma, glioblastoma, and others).
The MerTK ligands include growth arrest-specific 6 protein (GAS6; Chen, et al; Oncogene (1997) 14, 2033-2039), protein-S, tubby and tubby-like protein- 1 (TULP1), and galectin-3. Several of these ligands are present in serum and expressed locally in a number of tissues. These ligands bind to the extracellular domain of MerTK, resulting in tyrosine kinase activation.
Since the discovery of MerTK in 1994, there has been a growing body of literature that suggest MerTK as a drug target for a number of indications (see, e.g., WO 2013/052417; Frye, S.“Academic Drug Discovery and Chemical Biology,” Presentation at Northwestern's l8th Annual Drug Discovery Symposium, November 2013; WO 2011/146313/ WO
2014/062774; Liu et al. (2012) ACS Med Chem. Lett. 3(2): 129-134; Schlegel et al. (2013) 7. Clin. Invest. 123(5): 2257-67; Zhang et al. (2013) ./. Med. Chem. 56: 9683-9692; Liu et al. (2013) Eur. J. Med. Chem. 65: 83-93; Christoph et al. (2013 )Mol. Cancer Ther. 12(11): 2367-77; Linger et al. (2013) Blood 122: 1599-1609; Lee-Sherick et al. (2015) Ocotarget , Advanced Publications 2015). For example, MerTK is ectopically expressed or overexpressed in a number of hematologic and epithelial malignant cells. Expression of MerTK and GAS6 correlates with poor prognosis and/or chemoresistance in these tumor types. The mechanisms by which increased MerTK signaling in tumor cells contributes to tumor malignancy, however, remain unclear.
In 2013 it was determined that MerTK -/- knock-out mice are less susceptible to tumor growth than normal mice (Cook et al. (2013) J Clin. Invest. 123: 3231-3242). MerTK is normally expressed in myeloid lineage cells where it acts to suppress pro-inflammatory cytokines following ingestion of apoptotic material. It was found that MerTK -/- leukocytes exhibit lower tumor cell-induced expression of wound healing cytokines (IL-10 and GAS6) and enhanced expression of acute inflammatory cytokines (IL-12 and IL-6). Further, intratumoral CD8+ lymphocytes are increased. The loss of MerTK in the tumor
microenvironment in Mer-/- mice slowed the establishment, growth, and metastasis of mammary tumors and melanomas in immune competent, syngeneic mice.
Paolino et al. have reported on the treatment of wild-type NK cells with a newly developed small molecule TAM kinase inhibitor, LDC1267, that conferred therapeutic potential and efficiently enhanced anti-metastatic NK cell activity in vivo (Paolino et al. (2014) Nature 507: 508-512). Oral or intraperitoneal administration using this TAM inhibitor markedly reduced murine mammary cancer and melanoma metastases dependent on NK cells.
TAM receptor tyrosine kinases have been investigated for their involvement in certain infectious diseases. For example, Shimojima et al. reported the involvement of members of the Tyro3 receptor tyrosine kinase family, Axl, Dkt and MerTK, in the cell entry of filoviruses Ebola virus and Marburg virus, and concluded that each Tyro3 family member is likely a cell entry factor in the infection (Shimokima et al. (2006) Journal of Virology p. 10109- 10116). Additional diseases for which TAM receptor tyrosine kinases have been studied include, but are not limited to, microbial infections (U.S. 8,415,361), Zaire ebolavirus (Brindley et al. (2011) Virology 415: 83-84), vaccinia virus (Morizono et al. (2011) Cell Host & Microbe 9: 286-298; Morizono and Chen (2014) J. Virology 88(8): 4275-4290; Mercer and Helenius (2008) Science 320: 531-535), dengue virus (WO 2013/124324; Bhattacharayya et al. (2013) Cell Host & Microbe 14: 136-147; Meertens et al. (2012) Cell Host Microbe 12: 544-557), Yellow Fever (WO 2013/124324), West Nile (WO 2013/124324), ebola
(Bhattacharayya et al. (2013) Cell Host & Microbe 14: 136-147), and HTV (Bhattacharayya et al. (2013) Cell Host & Microbe 14: 136-147). Further, Bernsmeier et al. found that the number of monocytes and macrophages that expressed MerTK was greatly increased in circulation, livers, and lymph nodes of patients with acute-on-chronic liver failure (ACLF) (Bernsmeier et al. (2015) Gastroenterology 1-13). Addition of a substituted pyrazolopyrimidine (see WO 2011/146313, page 25) restored production of inflammatory cytokines.
TAM (Tyro3-Axl-Mer) receptor tyrosine kinases have also been investigated for their involvement in platelet aggregation. In 2004, Chen et al. observed that MerTK, presumably through activation by its ligand Gas6, participates in the regulation of platelet function in vitro and platelet-dependent thrombosis in vivo (Chen et al. (2004 ) Arterioscler. Thrombosis Vase. Biol. 1118-1123). Chen reported that PtdSer on aggregating platelets activates MerTK, helping to stabilize clot formation. MerTK knockout mice have decreased platelet
aggregation while maintaining normal bleeding times and coagulation parameters.
Consequently, these mice appear to be protected from thrombosis without concomitant increased spontaneous bleeding. See also, Angelillo-Scherrer et al. (2005) J. Clin. Invest. 115(2): 237-246).
Regarding MerTK and Axl dual inhibitors, the normal roles of MERTK and AXL in preventing or terminating innate immune-mediated inflammation and natural killer (NK) cell responses are subverted in the tumor microenvironment. MERTK and AXL decrease NK cell antitumor activity, which paradoxically allows increased metastases.
In addition, in solid tumors overexpression of AXL and MerTK promote
chemoresistance. Therefore, targeting AXL allowed for increased potency of small molecule MerTK inhibitors, both on its ability to decrease the activation of MERTK and downstream effectors, as well its ability to decrease proliferation and colony formation. The cooperative relationship between MERTK and AXL, and coordinated regulation of expression has been demonstrated. Specifically, inhibition of either receptor increases expression of the other receptor. Additionally, MERTK and AXL are capable of physical interaction, suggesting that heterodimerization between MERTK and AXL may be a relevant mechanism of dual receptor activation. Targeting these two receptors concurrently provided synergistic decreases in oncogenic signaling, cell proliferation and colony formation.
Dual inhibition of MERTK and AXL may be a rational combination strategy that may have clinical utility against NSCLC and other solid tumors.
Accordingly, methods for the use of the compounds of Formula I and Formula II will be discussed further herein. 1. TREATMENT METHODS
The compounds disclosed herein are useful for treating or controlling disorders of uncontrolled cellular proliferation, infections, and/or thrombotic or clotting disorders. Thus, in some embodiments are methods comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a composition comprising a disclosed compound to a subject.
The compounds disclosed herein are also useful as immunomodulatory or
immunostimulatory agents.
As discussed further below and disclosed herein, in some embodiments are provided methods for the treatment of a disorder associated with one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, the method comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I. In some embodiments, the method is treatment of a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
In other embodiments are provided methods for the treatment of a disorder associated with one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, the method comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II. In some other embodiments, the method is treatment of a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the disorder is a cancer, an infection, a fibrosis, a thrombotic disorder, a clotting disorder, or a disorder associated with an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the disorder is a cancer.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of breast cancer, cervical cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, colorectal cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer, pancreatic cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, glioma, leukemia, lymphoma, chronic myeloproliferative disorder, myelodysplastic syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasm, and plasma cell neoplasm (myeloma).
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the tumor or cancer is MerTK +/+.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the tumor or cancer is MerTK -/-.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the dsorder is an infection. As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the infection is viral.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the infection is bacterial.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the disorder is a fibrosis. In further embodiments, the fibrosis is a liver fibrosis.
As in any embodiment above, a method further comprising administering an additional active agent.
In embodiments, a method for inhibiting one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I. In some embodiments, the method is a method for inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I.
In other embodiments, a method for inhibiting one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II. In other embodiments, the method is a method for inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
As in any embodiment above, a method wherein the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a disorder related to one or more of Mer tyrosine kinase, Tyro3 tyrosine kinase, and Axl tyrosine kinase, prior to the administering step. In a further embodiment, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatement of a disorder related to Mer tyrosine kinase. a. U SE AS AN ANTITUMOR AGENT
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is capable of direct anti cancer effects by inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase within tumor cells. In some embodiments, the cancer treated overexpresses MerTK. In some embodiments, the cancer which
overexpresses MerTK is selected from the group consisting of acute myeloid leukemia, T-cell acute lymphoid leukemia, B-cell acute lymphoid leukemia, lung cancer, glioma, melanoma, prostate cancer, schwannoma, mantle cell lymphoma, and rhabdomyosarcoma. In some embodiments, the cancer ectopically expresses MerTK.
In some embodiments, the cancer treated has a mutation in the amino acid sequence of the MerTK extracellular or transmembrane domain selected from P40S (melanoma),
S159F (lung), E204K (urinary tract) S428G (gastric), 143 IF (lung), A446G (kidney), N454S (liver), W485S/C (lymphoma), and V486I (melanoma). In some embodiments the cancer treated has a mutation in the amino acid sequence of the MerTK cytosolic domain mutation selected from L586F (urinary tract), G594R (breast), S626C (urinary tract), P672S (lung), L688M (colon), A708S (head and neck), N718Y (lung), R722stop (colon), M790V (lung), P802S (melanoma), V873I Giver), S905F (lung), K923R (melanoma), P958L (kidney), D983N (liver), and D990N (colon).
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is administered to a host with a cancer in combination with one or more additional chemotherapeutic agents, resulting in a synergistic anti-cancer effect and the prolonged survival of a host compared to treatment with either a compound described herein or chemotherapeutic agent alone. In some embodiments, the use of a Mer TKI compound described herein in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent provides for increased antitumor effects without an increase in the standard of care dosage of the chemotherapeutic agent. In some embodiments, the use of a Mer TKI compound described herein in combination with a chemotherapeutic provides for equivalent or increased anti-tumor effects utilizing a lower dosage of a chemotherapeutic agent than the standard of care dosage.
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating a non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC). In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC) comprising
administering to the host an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition in combination with one or more additional chemotherapeutic agents. In some embodiments of the subject matter described herein, a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with another tyrosine kinase inhibitor. In some embodiments, the tyrosine kinase inhibitor is a fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibitor. In some embodiments, the FGFR inhibitor is AZD-4547. In some embodiments, the cancer is non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC). In some embodiments of the subject matter described herein, a method is provided to treat a host with non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC) comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with an additional tyrosine kinase inhibitor, wherein the additional tyrosine kinase inhibitor is selected from the group consisting of gefitinib and crizotinib.
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating a melanoma. In some embodiments, the administration of the Mer TKI compound described herein is combined with a chemotherapeutic agent. In some embodiments, the chemotherapeutic agent is an anti-programmed cell death -1 (PD-l) agent. In some embodiments, the chemotherapeutic agent is a B-RAF inhibitor. In some embodiments, the B-RAF inhibitor is vemurafenib. In some embodiments, the host does not have a melanoma with a B-RAF mutation. In some embodiments, the host has a melanoma with a B-RAF mutation. In some embodiments, the host has a melanoma with a RAS mutation. In some embodiments, the melanoma over-expresses MerT. In some embodiments, the melanoma has metastasized.
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL). In some embodiments, a method is provided to, treat a host with ALL comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition in combination with methotrexate.
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is provided for use in treating Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML). In some embodiments, the AML contains a wild type FLT3 protein. In some embodiments, the replication of the AML cells are dependent on FLT3 expression. In some embodiments, the AML contains a FLT3-ITD mutation. In some embodiments, the AML contains a FLT3-TKD mutation. In some embodiments, the AML contains both a FLT3-ITD and FLT3-TKD mutation. In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual MER/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is administered to a host suffering from AML, wherein the AML contains a mutation within the FLT3-TKD at amino acid F691 or D835.
In some embodiments, a tumor survival-signal inhibiting amount (for example 0.5 to 150 mg dose) of Mer TKI including compounds of the presently described subject matter is administered to a host alone or in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent and/or anti cancer targeted agent. In some embodiments, a tumor survival-signal inhibiting amount (for example, at least 150 mg/dose, and in some embodiments, at least 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, or 500 mg/dosage or more) of Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter is administered to a host alone or in combination with a
chemotherapeutic agent and/or anticancer targeted agent. In some embodiments, the Mer TKI and the chemotherapeutic agent act synergistically. In some embodiments, the use of a Mer TKI in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent provides for increased anti-tumor effects without an increase in the standard of care dosage of the chemotherapeutic agent.
In some embodiments, the use of a Mer TKI including compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with a chemotherapeutic provides for equivalent or increased antitumor effects utilizing a lower dosage of a chemotherapeutic agent than the standard of care dosage.
In some embodiments of the subject matter described herein, the Mer TKI including compounds of the presently described subject matter can be administered to a host with a cancer prior to, during, or after administration with a chemotherapeutic agent or exposure to ionizing radiation. In some embodiments, a host is administered an effective amount of a chemotherapeutic agent or ionizing radiation and subsequently administered a Mer TKI.
In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition in combination with an immunomodulatory agent. In some embodiments, the
immunomodulatory agent is selected from the group consisting of a CTLA-4 inhibitor, PD-l or anti -PD-l ligand, IFN-alpha, IFN-beta, and a vaccine, for example, a cancer vaccine. In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising
administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with Keytruda® (pembrolizumab). In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising
administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with Opdivo (nivolumab). In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with Yervoy® (ipilimumab). In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with an immunomodulatory agent selected from the group consisting of pembrolizumab and ipilimumab, wherein the cancer is melanoma. In some embodiments, the Mer TK is useful in the presently described subject matter, including active compounds of the presently described subject matter, are dual MER/Tyro3 TKIs. In some embodiments, the Mer TKIs are dual Mer/Axl TKIs. In some embodiments, the Mer TKIs are dual Mer/Tyro3 TKIs. In some embodiments, the Mer TKIs are MER-specific TKIs. In some embodiments, the Mer TKIs are Tyro3 -specific TKIs.
(i) TUMORS
The active compounds and methods described herein are useful for the treatment of tumors. As contemplated herein, the cancer treated can be a primary tumor or a metastatic tumor. In some embodiments, the methods described herein are used to treat a solid tumor, for example, melanoma, lung cancer (including lung adenocarcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, large cell carcinoma, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, bronchiogenic carcinoma, non-small-cell carcinoma, small cell carcinoma, mesothelioma); breast cancer (including ductal carcinoma, lobular carcinoma, inflammatory breast cancer, clear cell carcinoma, mucinous carcinoma, serosal cavities breast carcinoma); colorectal cancer (colon cancer, rectal cancer, colorectal adenocarcinoma); anal cancer; pancreatic cancer (including pancreatic adenocarcinoma, islet cell carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors); prostate cancer; prostate adenocarcinoma; ovarian carcinoma (ovarian epithelial carcinoma or surface epithelial-stromal tumor including serous tumor, endometrioid tumor and mucinous cystadenocarcinoma, sex-cprd-stromal tumor); liver and bile duct carcinoma (including hepatocellular carcinoma, cholangiocarcinoma, hemangioma); esophageal carcinoma
(including esophageal adenocarcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma); oral and
oropharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma; salivary gland adenoid cystic carcinoma; bladder cancer; gastric cancer; bladder carcinoma; carcinoma of the uterus (including endometrial adenocarcinoma, ocular, uterine papillary serous carcinoma, uterine clear-cell carcinoma, uterine sarcomas and leiomyosarcomas, mixed mullerian tumors); glioma, glioblastoma, medulloblastotna, and other tumors of the brain; kidney cancers (including renal cell carcinoma, clear cell carcinoma, Wilm's tumor); cancer of the head and neck (including squamous cell carcinomas); cancer of the stomach (gastric cancers, stomach adenocarcinoma, gastrointestinal stromal tumor); testicular cancer; germ cell tumor; neuroendocrine tumor; cervical cancer; carcinoids of the gastrointestinal tract, breast, and other organs; signet ring cell carcinoma; mesenchymal tumors including sarcomas, fibrosarcomas, haemangioma, angiomatosis, haemangiopericytoma, pseudoangiomatous stromal hyperplasia,
myofibroblastoma, fibromatosis, inflammatory myofibroblastic rumor, lipoma, angiolipoma, granular cell tumor, neurofibroma, schwannoma, angiosarcoma, liposarcoma,
rhabdomyosarcoma, osteosarcoma, leiomyoma, leiomysarcoma, skin, including melanoma, cervical, retinoblastoma, head and neck cancer, pancreatic, brain, thyroid, testicular, renal, bladder, soft tissue, adenal gland, urethra, cancers of the penis, myxosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteosarcoma, chordoma, malignant fibrous histiocytoma,
lymphangiosarcoma, mesothelioma, squamous cell carcinoma; epidermoid carcinoma, malignant skin adnexal tumors, adenocarcinoma, hepatoma, hepatocellular carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hypernephroma, cholangiocarcinoma, transitional cell carcinoma,
choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal cell carcinoma, glioma anaplastic; glioblastoma multiforme,, neuroblastoma, medulloblastoma, malignant meningioma, malignant schwannoma, neurofibrosarcoma, parathyroid carcinoma, medullary carcinoma of thyroid, bronchial carcinoid, pheochromocytoma, Islet cell carcinoma, malignant carcinoid, malignant paraganglioma, melanoma, Merkel cell neoplasm, cystosarcoma phylloide, salivary cancers, thymic carcinomas, and cancers of the vagina among others.
In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with a glioblastoma comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with temozolomide. In some embodiments, a method is provided to treat a host with a breast cancer comprising administering to the host an effective amount of a Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter in combination with trastuzumab.
In some embodiments, the cancer is NSCLC. In some embodiments, the cancer is a melanoma. In some embodiments, the cancer is breast cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a glioblastoma. In some embodiments, the cancer is a bone cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a brain cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a colon cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a rectal cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is an endometrial cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is an esophageal cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a cancer of the gastrointestinal tract. In some embodiments, the cancer is a kidney cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a liver cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a lung cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a mantle cell lymphoma. In some embodiments, the cancer is an ovarian cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a pancreatic cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a pituitary cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a prostate cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a skeletal muscle cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a skin cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a stomach cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a thyroid cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a neuroendocrine cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a gastroesophageal cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a renal cell cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a head and neck cancer.
In some embodiments, the methods described herein are useful for treating a host suffering from a lymphoma or lymphocytic or myelocytic proliferation disorder or abnormality. For example, the Mer TKIs as described herein can be administered to a subject suffering from a Hodgkin Lymphoma of a Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma. For example, the subject can be suffering from a Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma such as, but not limited to: an AIDS-Related Lymphoma; Anaplastic Large-Cell Lymphoma; Angioimmunoblastic Lymphoma; Blastic NK-Cell Lymphoma; Burkitf s Lymphoma; Burkitt-like Lymphoma (Small Non-Cleaved Cell Lymphoma); Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia/Small Lymphocytic Lymphoma; Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma; Diffuse Large B-Cell Lymphoma; Enteropathy- Type T-Cell Lymphoma; Follicular Lymphoma; Hepatosplenic Gamma-Delta T-Cell Lymphoma; Lymphoblastic Lymphoma; Mantle Cell Lymphoma; Marginal Zone
Lymphoma; Nasal T-Cell Lymphoma; Pediatric Lymphoma; Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas; Primary Central Nervous System Lymphoma; T-Cell Leukemias; Transformed Lymphomas; Treatment-Related T-Cell Lymphomas; or Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia.
Alternatively, the subject may be suffering from a Hodgkin Lymphoma, such as, but not limited to: Nodular Sclerosis Classical Hodgkin's Lymphoma (CHL); Mixed Cellularity CHL; Lymphocyte-depletion CHL; Lymphocyte-rich CHL; Lymphocyte Predominant Hodgkin Lymphoma; or Nodular Lymphocyte Predominant HL.
In some embodiments, the methods as described herein may be useful to treat a host suffering from a specific T-cell, a B-cell, or a NK-cell based lymphoma, proliferative disorder, or abnormality. For example, the subject can be suffering from a specific T-cell or NK-cell lymphoma, for example, but not limited to: Peripheral T-cell lymphoma, for example, peripheral T-cell lymphoma and peripheral T-cell lymphoma not otherwise specified (PTCL-NOS); anaplastic large cell lymphoma, for example anaplastic lymphoma kinase (ALK) positive, ALK negative anaplastic large cell lymphoma, or primary cutaneous anaplastic large cell lymphoma; angioimmunoblastic lymphoma; cutaneous T-cell lymphoma, for example mycosis fungoides, S zary syndrome, primary cutaneous anaplastic large cell lymphoma, primary cutaneous CD30+ T-cell lymphoproliferative disorder; primary cutaneous aggressive epidermotropic CD8+ cytotoxic T-cell lymphoma; primary cutaneous gamma-delta T-cell lymphoma; primary cutaneous small/medium CD4+ T-cell lymphoma and lymphomatoid papulosis; Adult T-cell Leukemia Lymphoma (ATLL); Blastic NK-cell Lymphoma; Enteropathy-type T-cell lymphoma; Hematosplenic gamma-delta T-cell Lymphoma; Lymphoblastic Lymphoma; Nasal NK T-cell Lymphomas; Treatment-related T- cell lymphomas; for example lymphomas that appear after solid organ or bone marrow transplantation; T-cell prolymphocyte leukemia; T-cell large granular lymphocytic leukemia; Chronic lymphoproliferative disorder of NK-cells; Aggressive NK cell leukemia; Systemic EBV+ T-cell lymphoproliferative disease of childhood (associated with chronic active EBV infection); Hydroa vacciniforme-like lymphoma; Adult T-cell leukemia/ lymphoma;
Enteropathy-associated T-cell lymphoma; Hepatosplenic T-cell lymphoma; or Subcutaneous panniculitis-like T-cell lymphoma.
Alternatively, the subject may be suffering from a specific B-cell lymphoma or proliferative disorder such as, but not limited to: multiple myeloma; Diffuse large B cell lymphoma; Follicular lymphoma; Mucosa-Associated Lymphatic Tissue lymphoma
(MALT); Small cell lymphocytic lymphoma; Mantle cell lymphoma (MCL); Burkitt lymphoma; Mediastinal large B cell lymphoma; Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia; Nodal marginal zone B cell lymphoma (NMZL); Splenic marginal zone lymphoma (SMZL);
Intravascular large B-cell lymphoma; Primary effusion lymphoma; or Lymphomatoid granulomatosis; Chronic ' lymphocytic leukemia/small lymphocytic lymphoma; B-cell prolymphocyte leukemia; Hairy cell leukemia Splenic lymphoma/leukemia, unclassifiable; Splenic diffuse red pulp small B-cell lymphoma; Hairy cell leukemia-variant;
Lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma; Heavy chain diseases, for example, Alpha heavy chain disease, Gamma heavy chain disease, Mu heavy chain disease; Plasma cell myeloma; Solitary plas acyto a of bone; Extraosseous plasmacytoma; Primary cutaneous follicle center lymphoma; T cell/histiocyte rich large B-cell lymphoma; DLBCL associated with chronic inflammation; Epstein-Barr virus (EBV)+ DLBCL of - the elderly; Primary mediastinal (thymic) large B-cell lymphoma; Primary cutaneous DLBCL, leg type; ALK+ large B-cell lymphoma; Plasmablastic lymphoma; Large B-cell lymphoma arising in HHV8 -associated multicentric; Castleman disease; B-cell lymphoma, unclassifiable, with features intermediate between diffuse large B-cell lymphoma and Burkitt lymphoma; B-cell lymphoma, unclassifiable, with features intermediate between diffuse large B-cell lymphoma and classical Hodgkin lymphoma; Nodular sclerosis classical Hodgkin lymphoma; Lymphocyte- rich classical Hodgkin lymphoma; Mixed cellularity classical Hodgkin lymphoma; or Lymphocyte-depleted classical Hodgkin lymphoma. In some embodiments, the methods described herein can be used to a subject suffering from a leukemia. For example, the subject may be suffering from an acute or chronic leukemia of a lymphocytic or myelogenous origin, such as, but not limited to: Acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL); Acute myelogenous leukemia (A L); Chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL); Chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML); juvenile myelomonocytic leukemia (JMML); hairy cell leukemia (HCL); acute promyelocytic leukemia (a subtype of AML); T- cell prolymphocyte leukemia (TPLL); large granular lymphocytic leukemia; or Adult T-cell chronic leukemia; large granular lymphocytic leukemia (LGL). In some embodiments, the patient suffers from an acute myelogenous leukemia, for example an undifferentiated AML (MO); myeloblastic leukemia (Ml ;
with/without minimal cell maturation); myeloblastic leukemia (M2; with cell maturation); promyelocytic leukemia (M3 or M3 variant [M3 V]); myelomonocytic leukemia (M4 or M4 variant with eosinophilia [M4E]); onocytic leukemia (M5); ervthroleukemia (M6); or megakaryoblastic leukemia (M7).
(ii) ACUTE MYELOID LEUKEMIA
In some embodiments, the methods described herein can be used to treat a host suffering from Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML). In some embodiments, the AML contains a wild type FLT3 protein. In some embodiments, the replication of the AML cells are dependent on FLT3 expression. In some embodiments, the AML contains a FLT3-ITD mutation. In some embodiments, the AML contains a FLT3-T D mutation. In some embodiments, the AML contains both a FLT3-ITD and FLT3-TKD mutation.
FLT3-ITD mutations are well known in the art. FLT3-TKD mutations are also well known in the art. In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual MER/FLT3 inhibitor is administered to a host suffering from AML, wherein the AML contains a mutation within the FLT3-TKD at amino acid F691 or D835. In some embodiments, the FLT3-TKD mutation is selected from D835H, D835N, D835Y, D835A, D835V, D835V, D835E, I836F, I836L, I836V, I836D, I836H, I836M, and F691L. In some embodiments, the host is suffering from the FLT3-TKD mutation D835Y. In some embodiments, the host is suffering from the FLT3-TKD mutation F691L.
In some embodiments, the host is suffering from acute promyelocytic leukemia (a subtype of AML); a minimally differentiated AML (MO); myeloblastic leukemia (Ml;
with/without minimal cell maturation); myeloblastic leukemia (M2; with cell maturation); promyelocytic leukemia (M3 or M3 variant [M3 V]); myelomonocytic leukemia (M4 or M4 variant with eosinophilia [M4E]); onocytic leukemia (M5); erythroleukemia (M6); or megakaryocyte leukemia (M7). In some embodiments, the host is suffering from AML that has relapsed or become refractory to previous treatments. In some embodiments, the host has previously been treated with a FLT3 inhibitor or other chemotherapeutic agent.
In some embodiments, the FLT3 inhibitors are efficacious against AML having both FLT3-ITD and FLT3-TKD mutations, wherein resistance to other FLT3 inhibitors, for example, AC220, has been established.
In some embodiments, the host has an Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML) comprising a FLT3 mutation, wherein the mutation confers resistance to a FLT3 inhibitor other than the FLT3 inhibitors described herein. In some embodiments, the host has an AML comprising a FLT3 mutation, wherein the mutation has conferred resistance to quizartinib (AC220) or other FLT3 inhibitor selected from lestaurtinib, sunitinib, sorafenib, tandutinib, midostaurin, amuvatinib crenolanib, dovitinib, ENMD-2076 (EntreMed), or KW-2449 (Kyowa Hakko Kirin), or a combination thereof.
(iii) CHEMOTHERAPEUTIC AGENTS
In some embodiments, an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination or alternation with a chemotherapeutic agent. Such agents may include, but are not limited to, tamoxifen, midazolam, letrozole, bortezomib, anastrozole, goserelin, an mTOR inhibitor, a PI3 kinase inhibitors, dual mTOR-PBK inhibitors, MEK inhibitors, RAS inhibitors, ALK inhibitors, HSP inhibitors (for example, HSP70 and HSP 90 inhibitors, or a combination thereof). Examples of mTOR inhibitors include but are not limited to rapamycin and its analogs, everolimus (Afmitor), temsirolimus, ridaforolimus, sirolimus, and
deforolimus. Examples of P13 kinase inhibitors include but are not limited to Wortmannin, demethoxyviridin, perifosine, idelalisib, PX-866, IPI-145, BAY 80-6946, BEZ235, RP6503, TGR 1202 (RP5264), MLN1117 (GNK1117), Pictilisib, Buparlisib, SAR245408 (XL147), SAR245409 (XL765), Palomid 529, ZSTK474, PWT33597, RP6530, CUDC-907, and AEZS-136. Examples of MEK inhibitors include but are not limited to Trametinib,
Selumetinib, MEK162, GDC-0973 (XL518), and PD0325901. Examples of RAS inhibitors include but are not limited to Reolysin and siGl2D LODER. Examples of ALK inhibitors include but are not limited to Crizotinib, AP261 13, and LDK378. HSP inhibitors include but are not limited to Geldanamycin or l7-N-Allylamino- l7-demethoxygeldanamycin (17AAG), and Radicicol. In some embodiments, the chemotherapeutic agent is an anti -programmed cell death -1 (PD-l) agent, for example, nivolumab, pembrolizumab, BMS936559,
lambrolizumab, MPDL3280A, pidilizumab, AMP- 244, and MED 14736. In some embodiments, the chemotherapeutic agent is a B-RAF inhibitor, for example, vemurafenib or sorafenib. In some embodiments, the chemotherapeutic agent is a FGFR inhibitor, for example, but not limited to, AZD4547, dovitinib, BGJ398, LY2874455, and ponatinib. In some embodiments, an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination with crizotinib.
In certain embodiments, the additional therapeutic agent is an anti-inflammatory agent, a chemotherapeutic agent, a radiotherapeutic, an additional therapeutic agent, or an immunosuppressive agent.
Suitable chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, radioactive molecules, toxins, also referred to as cytotoxins or cytotoxic agents, which includes any agent that is detrimental to the viability of cells, agents, and liposomes or other vesicles containing chemotherapeutic compounds. General anticancer pharmaceutical agents include: Vincristine (Oncovin®) or liposomal vincristine (Marqibo®), Daunorubicin (daunomycin or
Cerubidine®) or doxorubicin (Adriamycin®), Cytarabine (cytosine arabinoside, ara-C, or Cytosar®), L-asparaginase (El spar®) or PEG-L-asparaginase (pegaspargase or Oncaspar®), Etoposide (VP- 16), Teniposide (Vumon®), 6-mercaptopurine (6-MP or Purinethol®), Methotrexate, Cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan®), Prednisone, Dexamethasone (Decadron), imatinib (Gleevec®), dasatinib (Sprycel®), nilotinib (Tasigna®), bosutinib (Bosulif®), and ponatinib (Iclusig™). Examples of additional suitable chemotherapeutic agents include but are not limited to 1 -dehydrotestosterone, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine, 6-mercaptopurine, 6- thioguanine, actinomycin D, adriamycin, aldesleukin, alkylating agents, allopurinol sodium, altretamine, amifostine, anastrozole, anthramycin (AMC)), anti-mitotic agents, cis- dichlorodiamine platinum (GG) (DDP) cisplatin), diamino-dichloro-platinum, anthracyclines, antibiotics, antimetabolites, asparaginase, BCG live (intravesical), betamethasone sodium phosphate and betamethasone acetate, bicalutamide, bleomycin sulfate, busulfan, calcium leucovorin, calicheamicin, capecitabine, carboplatin, lomustine (CCNU), carmustine
(BSMJ), Chlorambucil, Cisplatin, Cladribine, Colchicine, conjugated estrogens,
Cyclophosphamide, Cyclophosphamide, Cytarabine, Cytarabine, cytochalasin B, Cytoxan, Dacarbazine, Dactinomycin, dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), Daunorubicin HC1, Daunorubicin citrate, denileukin diftitox, Dexrazoxane, Dibromomannitol, dihydroxy anthracin dione, Docetaxel, dolasetron mesylate, doxorubicin HC1, dronabinol, E. coli L- asparaginase, emetine, epoetin-a, Erwinia L-asparaginase, esterified estrogens, estradiol, estramustine phosphate sodium, ethidium bromide, ethinyl estradiol, etidronate, etoposide citrovorum factor, etoposide phosphate, filgrastim, floxuridine, fluconazole, fludarabine phosphate, fluorouracil, fiutamide, foli ic acid, gemcitabine HC1, glucocorticoids, goserelin acetate, gramicidin D, granisetron HC1, hydroxyurea, idarubicin HC1, ifosfamide, interferon a-2b, irinotecan HC1, letrozole, leucovorin calcium, leuprolide acetate, levamisole HC1, lidocaine, lomustine, maytansinoid, mecbJorethamine HC1, medroxyprogesterone acetate, megestrol acetate, melphalan HC1, mercaptopurine, mesna, methotrexate,
methyltestosterone, mithramycin, mitomycin C, mitotane, mitoxantrone, nilutamide, octreotide acetate, oligomycin A, ondansetron HC1, paclitaxel, pamidronate disodium, pentostatin, pilocarpine HC1, plimycin, polifeprosan 20 with carmustine implant, porfimer sodium, procaine, procarbazine HC1, propranolol, rituximab, sargramostim, streptozotocin, tamoxifen, taxol, teniposide, tenoposide, testolactone, tetracaine, thioepa chlorambucil, tMoguanine, thiotepa, topotecan HC1, toremifene citrate, trastuzumab, tretinoin, valrubicin, vinblastine sulfate, vincristine sulfate, and vinorelbine tartrate. In some embodiments, an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination with oligomycin A.
Additional therapeutic agents that can be administered in combination with a compound disclosed herein can include bevacizumab, sutinib, sorafenib, 2-methoxyestradiol or 2ME2, fmasunate, vatalanib, vandetanib, aflibercept, volociximab, etaracizumab (MEDI- 522), cilengitide, erlotinib, cetuximab, panitumumab, gefitinib, trastuzumab, dovitinib, figitumumab, atacicept, rituximab, alemtuzumab, aldesleukine, atlizumab, tocilizumab, temsirolimus, everolimus, lucatumumab, dacetuzumab, HLL1, huN90l-DMl, atiprimod, natalizumab, bortezomib, carfilzomib, marizomib, tanespimycin, saquinavir mesylate, ritonavir, nelfmavir mesylate, indinavir sulfate, belinostat, panobinostat, mapatumumab, lexatumumab, dulanermin, ABT-737, oblimersen, plitidepsin, talmapimod, P276-00, enzastaurin, tipifarnib, perifosine, imatinib, dasatinib, lenalidomide, thalidomide, simvastatin, ABT-888, temozolomide, erlotinib, lapatinib, sunitinib, FTS, AZD6244, BEZ235, and celecoxib. In some embodiments, an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination with gefitinib.
In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent for the treatment of AML. Such agents may include, but are not limited to, cytarabine (ara-C), anthracycline drugs including but not limited to, daunorubicin, idarubicin; cladribine, fludarabine, Gleevec® (imatinib), Sprycel® (dasatinib), adriamycin, arsenic trioxide, cerubidine, clafen, cyclophosphamide, cytarabine, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, vincristine, and topotecan. Some of the other chemo drugs that may be used to treat AML include: etoposide (VP- 16), 6-thioguanine (6-TG), hydroxyurea (Hydrea®), Corticosteroid drugs, such as prednisone or dexamethasone (Decadron®), methotrexate (MTX), 6-mercaptopurine (6-MP), azacitidine (Vidaza®), and decitabine (Dacogen®). In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with cytarabine.In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with an additional FLT3 inhibitor to treat with a host suffering from AML. Additional FLT3 inhibitors for use in combination with the FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitors described herein include lestaurtinib, sunitinib, sorafenib, tandutinib, midostaurin, crenolanib, dovitinib, ENMD-2076 (Entremed), amuvatinib, or KW- 2449 (Kyowa Hakko Kirin).
In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a Ras inhibitor. Examples of Ras inhibitors include but are not limited to Reolysin, FusOn-H2, and siG 12D LODER.
In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a Phosphoinositide 3 -kinase inhibitor (PI3K inhibitor). PI3K inhibitors that may be used in the presently described subject matter are well known. Examples of PI3K inhibitors include but are not limited to Wortmannin, demethoxyviridin, perifosine, idelalisib, Pictilisib, Palomid 529, ZSTK474, PWT33597, CUDC-907, AEZS-136, PX-866, IPI-145, RP6503, SAR245408 (XL147), duvelisib, GS-9820, GDC-0032 (2-[4-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5- methyl-l,2,4- triazol-3-yl)-5,6-dmydroimidazo[l,2-d][l,4]benzoxazepin-9-yl]pyrazol-l-yl]-2- methylpropanamide), MLN-1 1 17 ((2R)-l-Phenoxy-2-butanyl hydrogen (S)- methylphosphonate; or Methyl(oxo) {[(2R)-l-phenoxy-2-butanyl]oxy}phosphonium)), BYL- 719 ((2S)-Nl -[4-Methyl-5-[2-(2,2,2-trifluoro- 1 , 1 -dimethyl ethyl)-4-pyridinyl]-2- thiazolyl]- 1 ,2-pyrroLidinedicarboxamide), GSK2126458 (2,4-Difluoro-N-{2-(methyloxy)-5- [4-(4- pyrida5dnyl)-6-quinolinyl]-3-pyridinyl}benzenesulfonamide), TGX-221 ((±)-7- Methyl-2- (mocpholm-4-yl)-9-(l- henylan moethyl -pydo[l,2-a]- yrimidin-4-one))
GSK2636771 (2- Memyl-l-(2-memyl-3-(trifluoromemyl)benzycarboxylic acid
dihydrochloride), KTN-193 ((R)-2-((l-(7-methyl-2-morpholino-4-oxo-4H- pyrido[l,2- a]pyrimidin-9-yl)ethyI)amino)benzoic acid), TGR-1202/RP5264, GS-9820 ((S)- 1- (4-((2-(2- aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-7-methyl-4-mohydroxypropan- 1 -one), GS-1101 (5-fluoro- 3-phenyl-
2-([S)]-l-[9H-purin-6-ylammo]-propyl)-3H-quinazolin-4-one), AMG-319, GSK- 2269557, SAR245409 (N-(4-(N-(3-((3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)amino)quinoxaLin-2- yl)sulfamoyl)phenyl)-
3-methoxy-4 methylbenzamide), BAY80-6946 (2-amino-N-(7- memoxy-8-(3-mo holinopro oxy)-2,3-dihydroi idazo[l,2-c]quinaz), AS 252424 (5-[l-[5-(4- Fluoro-2-hydroxy-phenyl)- furan-2-yl]-meth-(Z)-ylidene]-thiazolidine-2,4-dione), CZ 24832 (5-(2-amino-8-fluoro- [l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-N-tert-butylpyridme-3-sulfona Buparlisib (5-[2,6-Di(4- morpholinyl)-4- pyrimidinyl]-4-(txifluoromemyl)-2-pyridmanune), GDC-0941 (2-(lH- Indazol-4-yl)-6-[[4-(methylsulfonyl)4-piperazinyl]methyl]-4-(4- morpholmyl)thieno[3,2- djpyrimidine), GDC-0980 ((S)-l-(4 (2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-7- meth l-4-mo
holmotrueno[3,2-d]pyrilni din-6 yl)methyl)piperazin-l-yl)-2-hydroxypropan-l- one (also known as RG7422)), SF1126 ((8S,l4S,l7S)-l4-(carboxymethyl)-8-(3- gnarddinopropyl)-l7- (hydroxymethyl)-3, 6,9,l2,l5-pentaoxo-l-(4-(4-oxo-8-phenyl-4H- chromen-2-yl
)morpholino-4-ium)-2-oxa-7, 10, 13 , l6-tetraazaoctadecan- l8-oate), PF- 05212384 (N-[4- [[4-(Dimethylamino)-l- piperidinyl]carbonyl]phenyl]-N'-[4-(4,6-di-4- morpholinyl-l,3,5- triazin-2-yl)phenyl]urea), LY3023414, BEZ235 (2-Methyl-2-{4-[3-methyl- 2-oxo-8- (quinolin-3-yl)-2,3-dmydro-lH-imidazo[4,5-c]qumolm-l-yl]phenyl}propanem XL-765 (N-(3- (N-(3-(3,5-dimemoxyphenylammo)quinoxalin-2-yl)sulfamoyl)phenyl)-3- methoxy-4- methylbenzamide), and GSK1059615 (5-[[4-(4-Pyridinyl)-6- quinolinyl]methylene]-2,4- thiazolidenedione), PX886 ([(3aR,6E,9S,9aR,lOR,l laS)-6- [[bisArop-2- enyl)ammo]memylidene]-5-hydxoxy-9-(methoxymelhyl)-9a,l la-ditrioxo-2,3,3a,9,l0,ll- hexahydroindeno[4,5h]isochromen- lO-yl] acetate (also known as sonolisib)), and the structure described in W02014/071109 having the formula:
Figure imgf000066_0001
In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with a modulator of the STAT5 pathway. Compounds which modulate the Janus Kinase 2 (JAK2) - Signal Transducer and Activator of Transcription 5 (STAT5) pathway include but are not limited to Lestaurtinib, Ruxolitinib, SB1518, CYT387, LY3009104, INC424, LY2784544, BMS-91 1543, NS-018, and TG101348.
In some embodiments, a FLT3 or dual Mer/FLT3 inhibitor described herein is used in combination with an AKT inhibitor, including but not limited to, MK-2206, GSK690693, Perifosine, (KRX-0401), GDC-0068, Triciribine, AZD5363, Honokiol, PF-04691502, and Miltefosine. (iv) IMMUNOMODULATORY COMBINATION AGENTS
Active compounds as described herein used in a dosage for direct effect on the diseased cell can be used in combination with one or more immunotherapy agents for additive or synergistic efficacy against solid tumors. In some embodiments, a tumor associated macrophage MerT inhibiting amount of a Mer T J is used in combination or alternation with the immunomodulatory agent. In some embodiments, a host tumor survival- signal inhibiting, antiviral or antibacterial amount of a Mer T I is used in combination or alternation with the immunomodulatory agent.
Immunomodulators are small molecules or biologic agents that treat a disease by inducing, enhancing or suppressing the host's immune system. In the present application, one or more immunomodulators are selected that induce or enhance the host's immune system. Some immunomodulators boost the host's immune system and others help train the host's immune system to better attack tumor cells. Other immunomodulators target proteins that help cancer grow.
Three general categories of immunotherapies are antibodies, cancer vaccines, and non-specific immunotherapies. Antibodies are typically administered as monoclonals, although that is not required.“Naked monoclonal antibodies” work by attaching to antigens on tumor cells. Some antibodies can act as a marker for the body's immune system to destroy the tumor cells. Others block signaling agents for tumor cells. Antibodies can generally be used to bind to any signaling or metabolic agent that directly or indirectly facilitates tumor growth. Examples are alemtuzumab (Campath) which binds to CD52 antigen, and
trastuzumab (Herceptin), which binds to the HER2 protein.
In some embodiments, an antibody can be used that is conjugated to another moiety that increases it delivery or efficacy. For example, the antibody can be connected to a cytotoxic drug or a radiolabel. Conjugated antibodies are sometimes referred to as“tagged, labeled or loaded”. Radiolabeled antibodies have small radioactive particles attached to them. Examples are Zevalin, which is an antibody against CD20 used to treat lymphoma.
Chemolabeled antibodies are antibodies that have cytotoxic agents attached to them.
Examples are Adcetris, which targets CD30, and Kadcyla, which targets HER2. Ontak, while not an antibody, is similar in that it is interleukin-2 attached to a toxin from diphtheria.
Another category of immunotherapy that can be used in the presently described subject matter is a cancer vaccine. Most cancer vaccines are prepared from tumor cells, parts of tumor cells or pure antigens. The vaccine can be used with an adjuvant to help boost the immune response. An example is Provenge, which is the first cancer vaccine approved by the US FDA. The vaccine can for example be a dendritic cell vaccine or a vector-based vaccine
Nonspecific tumor immunotherapies and adjuvants include compounds that stimulate the immune system to do a better job at attacking the tumor cells. Such immunotherapies include cytokines, interleukins, interferons (a primarily but can be also b or g). Specific agents include granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor (GM-CSF), IL-12, IL-7, IL-21, drugs that target CTLA-4 (such as Yervoy, which is Ipilimumab) and drugs that target PD-l or PDL-l (such as for example, nivolumab (BMS), pembrolizumab (Merck), pidilizumab (CureTech/Teva), AMP -244 (Amplimmune/GSK), BMS-936559 (BMS), and MEDI4736 (Roche/Genentech)).
Other drugs that boost the immune system are thalidomide, lenalidomide,
pomalidomide, the Bacille Calmette-Gurin bacteria and Imiquimod. Additional therapeutic agents that can be used in combination with the MerTK inhibitor include bispecific antibodies, chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) T-cell therapy and tumor-infiltrating
lymphocytes.
In some embodiments of the presently described subject matter, a compound described herein can be combined with at least one immunosuppressive agent. The immunosuppressive agent is preferably selected from the group consisting of a calcineurin inhibitor, e.g. a cyclosporin or an ascomycin, e.g. Cyclosporin A (NEORAL®), FK506 (tacrolimus), pimecrolimus, a mTOR inhibitor, e.g. rapamycin or a derivative thereof, e.g. Sirolimus (RAPAMUNE®), Everolimus (Certican®), temsirolimus, zotarolimus, biolimus-7, biolimus-9, a rapalog, e.g.ridaforolimus, azathioprine, campath 1H, a SIP receptor modulator, e.g. fmgolimod or an analogue thereof, an anti IL-8 antibody, mycophenolic acid or a salt thereof, e.g. sodium salt, or a prodrug thereof, e.g. Mycophenolate Mofetil (CELLCEPT®), OKT3 (ORTHOCLONE OKT3®), Prednisone, ATGAM®, THYMOGLOBULIN®, Brequinar Sodium, OKT4, T10B9.A-3A, 33B3.1, l5-deoxyspergualin, tresperimus,
Leflunomide ARAVA®, CTLAI-Ig, anti-CD25, anti-IL2R, Basiliximab (SIMULECT®), Daclizumab (ZENAPAX®), mizorbine, methotrexate, dexamethasone, ISAtx-247, SDZ ASM 981 (pimecrolimus, Elidel®), CTLA4lg (Abatacept), belatacept, LFA3 lg, etanercept (sold as Enbrel® by Immunex), adalimumab (Humira®), infliximab (Remicade®), an anti- LFA-l antibody, natalizumab (Antegren®), Enlimomab, gavilimomab, antithymocyte immunoglobulin, siphzumab, Alefacept efalizumab, pentasa, mesalazine, asacol, codeine phosphate, benorylate, fenbufen, naprosyn, diclofenac, etodolac and indomethacin, aspirin and ibuprofen. b. USE AS AN IMMUNOMODULATORY OR IMMUNOSTIMULATORY
AGENT
In various embodiments, the compounds described herein can be used as
immunomodulatory agents that reverse the MerTK -induced suppression of proimflammatory cytokines such as wound healing cytokines (IL-10 and GAS6) and enhance the expression of acute inflammatory cytokines (IL-12 and IL-6). In this way, the aminopyrimidine compounds can“re-normalize” or“re-program” the host microenvironment in the diseased tissue area to attack the diseased cells. This immunostimulatory activity can be used therapeutically to treat a host with a tumor, cancer or other neoplasm, or alternatively, to treat a host with an infection, for example, a viral or bacterial infection.
Taking advantage of the immunomostimulatory activity of the compounds described herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition, salt, isotopic analog, or prodrug thereof, may be used for the treatment of a MERTK -negative (-/-) tumor or cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is a MERTK -negative (-/-) breast cancer.
Therefore, as part of the subject matter described herein, one or more of the compounds disclosed herein can be used as adjunctive therapy for its immunostimulatory effect as a means to increase the efficacy of the antineoplastic standard of care therapies, such as chemotherapeutic compounds or radiation.
In some embodiments of the subject matter described herein, one or more of the compounds disclosed herein can be used as adjunctive therapy for its immunostimulatory effect as a means to increase the efficacy of the antiviral or antibacterial standard of care therapies.
For example, a disclosed compound or composition is administered to a host in an immunomodulatory effective amount to inhibit Mer tyrosine kinase activity in the host's tumor associated macrophage to suppress tumor immunity. In some embodiments, the dosage of the Mer TKI administered as an immunomodulatory agent to stimulate innate anti-tumor immunity is lower than a dosage of a Mer TKI administered to a host as a direct anti-cancer agent. In some embodiments, the Mer TKI is administered at a dosage which exhibits immunomodulatory but not direct cytotoxic effect.
In some embodiments, the cancer is a MERTK -negative (-/-) cancer.
Without wanting to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that the administration of a chemotherapeutic agent results in the apoptosis of tumor cells, exposing antigenic tumor proteins. The host's innate immune system is thus stimulated to recognize the antigenic apoptotic components from the tumor cells after chemotherapy or ionizing radiation and mount an immune response. In some embodiments, the administration of a
chemotherapeutic agent or ionizing radiation, before, with or subsequently followed by the administration of a Mer TKI is carried out using the normal standard of care
chemotherapeutic protocol. In some embodiments, the standard of care protocol of the chemotherapeutic is changed in a manner that causes less toxicity to the host due to the adjunctive or synergistic activity of the Mer TKI.
In some embodiments, a method for the treatment of a tumor is provided that includes administering an effective amount of a Mer TKI to inhibit TK signaling in a tumor associated macrophage, without inhibiting the survival signal in the tumor itself. In this way, the Mer TKI can be used to ramp up the immune response to the tumor by inhibiting macrophage tumorogenic tolerance during normal tumor chemotherapeutic agent. The immunomodulatory dosage of the Mer TKI can be given prior to, with or after chemotherapeutic therapy and can be used simultaneously with or intermittently with the chemotherapeutic therapy. In some embodiments, less chemotherapeutic therapy is needed than the normal standard of care defined for that chemotherapeutic agent, due to the increased efficacy of the immune response in the surrounding tumor microenvironment. In some embodiments, a dose of Mer TKI including active compounds of the presently described subject matter (for example 0.5 to 150 mg/dose) is given as a type of adjunctive therapy with the chemotherapeutic agent.
In some embodiments of the subject matter described herein, a Mer TKI is administered to a host having a cancer as an immunomodulatory agent to inhibit Mer tyrosine kinase activity in a tumor associated macrophage in order to suppress tumor immunity. In some embodiments, the dosage of the Mer TKI administered as an immunomodulatory agent to stimulate innate anti-tumor immunity is lower than a dosage of a Mer TKI adniinistered to a host as a direct anti -cancer agent. In some embodiments, the Mer TKI is administered at a dosage which exhibits immunomodulatory but not direct cytotoxic effects on the cancer.
In some embodiments, the dose associated with the immunomodulatory effect of an active compound of the presently described subject matter is about 2-fold, about 3 -fold, about 4-fold, about 5- fold, about 6-fold, about 7-fold, about 8-fold, about 9-fold, about 10- fold or greater lower than the dose associated with a direct survival -signal inhibiting anti tumor or cytotoxic effect, or the direct antiviral or antibacterial effect. In some embodiments, the dose used to induce an immunomodulatory effect in a host is between about 0.5 mg and about 150 mg. In some embodiments, the dose is about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5mg, about 10 mg, about 12 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 110 mg, about 125 mg, about 140 mg, or about 150 mg. c. USE AS AN ANTI-INFECTIVE AGENT
In various embodiments, an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition can be administered as an immunomodulatory agent to stimulate the innate immune system. This immunostimulatory activity can be used therapeutically to treat a host with an infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a viral infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition can be used to treat a host bearing any virus-related infection where the virus has a virion envelope phosphatidyl serine that complexes with MerTK to achieve viral entry or is otherwise facilitated by MerTK in the infectious process or maintenance.
(i) VIRAL INFECTIONS
The virus may be an enveloped virus or a non-enveloped virus. In some embodiments, the host is infected or threatened to become infected with a virus selected from, for example, Flaviviridae viruses, including Flavivirus (such as Yellow Fever, West Nile and Dengue), Hepacivirus (Hepatitis C virus,“HCV”), Pegivirus and Pestivirus (Bovine viral diarrhea virus); Filoviridae viruses, including Ebola viruses; Togaviridae viruses, including
Chikungunya virus; Coronaviruses, such as SARS (Severe acute respiratory syndrome) and MERS (Middle East respiratory syndrome); Orthomyxoviridae viruses, for example influenza; Paramyxoviridae viruses, for example Respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), measles and mumps; and Caliciviridae viruses, including Lagovirus, Vesivirus, and Sapovirus and Norovirus (Norwalk -like virus), and Lentiviruses, for example, HIV. In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination or alternation with another anti-viral agent for combination therapy.
More broadly, the host to be treated may be infected with an enveloped virus including, but not limited to, viruses of the following families: Bomaviridae, Bunyaviridae, Coronaviridae, Filoviridae, Flaviridae, Hepadnaviridae, Herpesviridae, Nyamiviridae, Orthomyxoviridae, Paramyxoviridae, Poxyiridae, Retroviridae, Rhabdoviridae, and Togaviridae. Examples of viruses form the Bunyaviridae family include, but are not limited to, bunya viruses such as La Crosse virus and Hantaan. Examples of viruses from the Coronaviridae family include, but are not limited to, coronaviruses such as SARS virus or Toroviruses. Examples of viruses from the Filoviradae family include, but are not limited to, Ebola and Marburg. Examples of viruses from the Flaviridae family include, but are not limited to, dengue, encephalitis viruses including West Nile virus, Japanese encephalitis virus and yellow fever virus and Hepatitis C virus. Examples of viruses from the Hepadnaviridae family include, but are not limited to, Hepatitis B. Examples of viruses from the
Herpesviridae family include, but are not limited to, cytomegalovirus, herpes simplex viruses 1 and 2, HHV-6, HHV-7, HHV-8, pseudorabies virus, and varicella zoster virus. Examples of viruses from the Orthomyxoviridae family include, but are not limited to, influenza virus. Examples of viruses from the Paramyxoviridae family include, but are not limited to, measles, metapneumovirus, mumps, parainfluenza, respiratory syncytial virus, and sendai. Examples of viruses from the Poxviridae family include,' but are not limited to, pox viruses such as smallpox, monkey pox, and MoUuscum contagiosum virus, variola viruses, vaccinia virus, and yatapox viruses such as Tanapox and Yabapox. Examples of viruses from the Retroviridae family include, but are not limited to, Coltiviruses such as CTFV and Banna virus, human immunodeficiency viruses such as HIV-l and HTV-2, murine leukemia virus, simian immunodeficiency virus, feline immunodeficiency virus, human T-cell leukemia viruses 1 and 2, and XMRV. Examples of viruses from the Rhabdoviridae family include, but are not limited to, vesicular stomatitis and rabies. Examples of viruses from the Togaviridae family include, but are not limited to, rubella viruses or alpha viruses such as Chikungunya virus, Eastern equine encephalitis virus, O'nyong'nyong virus, Ross River virus, Semliki Forest virus, Sindbis, Venezuelan equine encephalitis or Western equine encephalitis virus.
In some embodiments, the host is infected with Chikungunya virus. In some embodiments, the host is infected with Ebola virus. In some embodiments, an active compound or Mer TKI as described herein is used in combination with brincidofovir
(CMXOOl).
In some embodiments, the host is infected with a non-enveloped virus, sch as, but not limited to, viruses of the following families: Adenoviridae, Arenaviridae, Bimaviridae, Calciviridae, Iridoviridae, Ophioviridae Parvoviradae, Papillomaviridae, Papovaviridae, Picornaviridae, and Reoviridae. Examples of viruses from the Adenoviridae family include, but are not limited to adenoviruses. Examples of viruses from the Arenaviradae family include, but are not limited to, hemorrhagic fever viruses such as Guanarito, LCMV, Lassa, Junin, and Machupo. Examples of viruses from the Iridoviridae family include, but are not limited to, African swine fever virus. Examples of viruses from the Papillomavirus family include, but are not limited to, papillomaviruses. Examples of viruses from the Papovaviridae family include, but are not limited to, polyoma viruses such as BK virus and JC virus.
Examples of viruses from the Parvoviridae family include, but are not limited to,
parvoviruses such as human bocavirus and adeno-associated virus. Examples of viruses from the Picomaviridae family include, but are not limited to, aptoviruses, cardioviruses, coxsackieviruses, echoviruses, enteric viruses, enteroviruses, foot and mouth disease virus, hepatitis A virus, hepatoviruses, Poliovirus, and rhinovirus. Examples of viruses from the Reoviradae family include, but are not limited to, orbiviruses, reoviruses and rotaviruses.
In some embodiments, a host is infected with a virus such as an astroviruses, caliciviruses including but not limited to, Norovirus and Norwalk, and Hepeviruses including, but not limited to, Hepatitis E.
As described above, a compound described herein can be administered to a host suffering from a viral infection in combination with another anti-viral or anti-infective compound. Antiviral compounds that can be used in combination with the compounds described herein include, but are not limited to, abacavir, acyclovir, adefovir, amantadine, amprenavir, ampligen, arbitol, atazanavir, balavir, boceprevir, boceprevirertet, cidofovir, dolutegravir, darunavir, delavirdine, didanosine, docosanol, edoxudine, efavirenz,
emtricitabine, epivir, enfuvirtide, entecavir, famciclovir, fomivirsen, fosamprenavir, foscarnet, fosfonet, ganciclovir, ibacitabine, imunovir, idoxuridine, imiquimod, indinavir, lamivudine, Iopinavir, loviride, maraviroc, moroxydine, neJfmavir, nevirapine, nexavir, oseltamivir, penciclovir, peramivir, pleconaril, podophyllotoxin, raltegravir, ribavirin, rilpivirine, rimantadine, pyramidine, saquinavir, simeprevir, sofosbuvir, stavudine, telaprevir, tenofovir, tipranavir, trifluridine, trizivir, tromantadine, traporved, truvada, valaciclovir, valganciclovir, vicriviroc, vidarabine, viramidine, zalcitabine, zanamivir, and zidovudine.
In some embodiments, a host is infected with a human immunodeficiency virus and is administered a compound described herein in combination with the anti-HIV combination drug, such as Atripla® or other drug that includes emtricitabine. In some embodiments, the patient with the human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with atazanavir, ritonavir, or Truvada® in combination with a compound described herein. In some embodiments, the patient infected with human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination of dolutegravir, Truvada® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, human immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination dolutegravir, Epzicom® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with human
immunodeficiency virus can be treated with a combination of raltegravir, Truvada® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with human
immunodeficiency virus can be treated with the combination of Complera® and a compound described herein. It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that a host infected with HIV can be treated with a number of combinations of drugs depending on the mutation pattern of the virus. The patient can be treated with an appropriate combination of drugs in combination with a compound described herein.
In some embodiments, the host is infected with a hepatitis C virus and is treated with an anti -hepatitis C drug in addition to the active compound described herein. For example, the patient can be treated with a combination of Sovaldi™, Harvoni®, ribavirin, and/or a pegylated interferon and a compound described herein. In some embodiments the pegylated interferon is Peglntron®. In some embodiments, the pegylated interferon is Pegasys®. In some embodiments, the host infected with hepatitis C virus is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, the host infected with hepatitis C virus is treated with Harvoni®, ribavirin and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C virus is treated with a combination of Olysio™, ribavirin, a pegylated interferon and a compound described herein. In some embodiments the pegylated interferon is Peglntron®. In some embodiments, the pegylated interferon is Pegasys®. In some embodiments, the host is infected with a hepatitis C virus and is treated with a combination of ABT-267, ABT-333 and ABT-450/ritonavir, in addition to an active compound described herein. In some embodiments, the host is infected with a hepatitis C virus and is treated with a combination of MK-5172 and MK-8742, in addition to an active compound described herein.
In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with a combination of Sovaldi™, ribavirin, a pegylated interferon and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with Sovaldi™ and a compound described herein for 12 weeks followed by ribavirin, pegylated interferon and a compound described herein for 24 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 2 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 3 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 3 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 4 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 4 is treated with a combination of Olysio™, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks followed by ribavirin, pegylated interferon and a compound described herein for 24-28 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 5 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 5 is treated with ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 48 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 6 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 6 is treated with ribavirin, pegylated interferon, and a compound described herein for 48 weeks.
In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with Sovaldi , Olysio , ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 1 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 2 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 12 weeks. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis C genotype 3 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks. In some embodiments, a patient infected with hepatitis C genotype 4 is treated with Sovaldi™, ribavirin, and a compound described herein for 24 weeks.
In some embodiments, a host infected with papilloma virus is treated with imiquimod and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with papilloma virus is treated with cryotherapy and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, papilloma virus is surgically removed from a host and the host is treated with a compound described herein. Jn some embodiments, the host receives a compound described herein prior to, during, and post-surgery. In some embodiments, the patient receives a compound described herein post-surgery.
In some embodiments a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 is treated with Famvir® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 is treated with acyclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 is treated with acyclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 is treated with Valtrex® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 is treated with Valtrex® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to'treatment with acyclovir. In some
embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to treatment with acyclovir. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 1 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to treatment with Valtrex®. In some embodiments, a host infected with herpes simplex type 2 virus receives a compound described herein for 7 days prior to treatment with
Valtrex®.
In some embodiments a host infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with acyclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with Valtrex® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments ahost infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with famciclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with varicella zoster virus, VZV, is treated with foscamet and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with varicella zoster virus is treated with a compound described herein prior to vaccination with Zostavax®. In some embodiments, a host infected with varicella zoster virus is treated with a compound described herein prior to and post vaccination with Zostavax®.
In some embodiments a host infected with influenza virus is treated with Relenza® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host infected with influenza virus is treated with Tamiflu® and a compound described herein. In some embodiments a host is infected with influenza virus and is treated with amantadine and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with influenza virus is treated with rimantadine and a compound described herein.
In some embodiments, a hostinfected with cytomegalovirus is treated with valganciclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with cytomegalovirus is treated with ganciclovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with cytomegalovirus is treated with foscarnet and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with cytomegalovirus is treated with cidofovir and a compound described herein.
In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with
lamivudine and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with adefovir and a compound described herein.
In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with tenofovir and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a host infected with hepatitis B virus is treated with telbivudine and a compound described herein.
(v) BACTERIAL INFECTIONS
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition is used in an effective amount to treat a host infected with a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, the bacteria treated is, for example, a Gram-negative bacilli (GNB), especially Escherichia coli, Gram positive cocci (GPC), Staphylococcus aureus, Enterococcus faecalis, or Streptococcus pneumoniae. In some embodiments, the bacterial infection may be caused, for example, by a Gram-negative bacteria, including, but not limited to Escherichia coli, Salmonella, and other Enterobacteriaceae, Pseudomonas, Moraxella, Helicobacter, Stenotrophomonas,
Bdellovibrio, acetic acid bacteria, Legionella, Staphylococcus aureus, Hemophilus influenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, Pseudomonas aeruginosa,
Vibrio cholerae, Proteus mirabilis, Enterobacter cloacae, Serratia marcescens, Clostridium tetani, Helicobacter pylori, Salmonella enteritidis, Salmonella typhi, Shigella flexneri, or Acinetobacter baumanii. In some embodiments, the bacterial infection may be caused, for example, by a Gram-positive species from the following genera: Bacillus, Listeria,
Staphylococcus, Enterococcus, Lactobacillus, Lactococcus, Leuconostoc, Pedicoccus, Streptococcus, Acetobacterium, Clostridium, Eubacterium, Heliobacterium, Heliospirillum, Megasphaera, Pectinatus, Selenomonas, Zymophilus, Sporomusa, Mycoplasma, Spiroplasma, Ureaplas a, or Erysipelothrix.
In some embodiments, the bacterial infection is associated with liver failure. In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an antibiotic or another anti -bacterial agent.
In some embodiments, the bacterial infection is associated with liver failure. In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an antibiotic or another anti-bacterial agent.
In some embodiments, a patient is suffering from acute-on-chronic liver failure (ACLF). In some embodiments, a patient is suffering from acute liver failure. In some embodiments, a patient is suffering from chronic liver failure. In some embodiments, the liver failure is caused by a disease or condition selected from alcoholic liver disease, chronic viral hepatitis type C, chronic viral hepatitis type B, chronic bile duct blockage, Wilson's disease, hemochromatosis, exposure to drug and toxins, autoimmune hepatitis, cystic fibrosis, alpha antitrypsin deficiency, obesity or schistosomiasis. In some embodiments, the fibrosis is a liver fibrosis.
In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an antibiotic for the prevention or treatment of bacterial infections.
Examples of antibiotics include, but are not limited to, cefotaxime (Claforan), ofloxacin (Floxin), norfloxacin (Noroxin) or trimethoprim sulfamethoxazole (Bactrim, Septra). d. USE AS AN ANTI-PLATELET AGENT
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is used in the treatment of blot clot (thrombus) formation in a host in need thereof. In some embodiments, the host is suffering from coronary artery disease, peripheral vascular disease, or cerebrovascular disease. In some embodiments, a compound described herein is administered to a host prior to any medical or surgical procedure in which diminished coagulation potential is desirable.
In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with another anti -thrombotic or anti -clotting agent.
In some embodiments, a disclosed compound or composition as described herein, is provided for use in treating blot clot (thrombus) formation in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering an active compound as described herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition, salt, isotopic analog, or prodrug thereof.
In some embodiments, the treatment of blood clot formation is in, for example, a subject with coronary artery disease, peripheral vascular disease, or cerebrovascular disease, or the treatment is given prior to any medical or surgical procedure in which diminished coagulation potential is desirable. Coronary artery disease includes, for example, any coronary dysfunction (pathological state) resulting from coronary artherosclerosis, i.e. partial or total occlusion of coronary vessels. The term also includes a range of various acute and chronical pathological states comprising stable and unstable angina pectoris (SAP and UAP, respectively), left ventricular dysfunction LVD, (congestive) heart failure CHF, myocardial death. Peripheral vascular disease includes, for example, occlusive or functional peripheral arterial disease (PAD). Examples of occlusive PAD include peripheral arterial occlusion, which may be acute, and Buerger's disease (thomboangiitis obliterans). Examples of functional PAD include Raynaud's disease, Raynaud's phenomenon, and acrocyanosis.
Cerebrovascular disease includes, for example, any abnormality of the brain resulting from a pathologic process of a blood vessel. In some embodiments, the cerebrovascular disease is selected from cerebral ischemia, cerebral hemorrhage, ischemic stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, or ischemic reperfusion injury resulting from reintroduction of blood flow following cerebral ischemia or ischemic stroke. In further embodiments, the medical or surgical procedure is pulmonary vein ablation.
In some embodiments, the treatment of blood clot formation is in a host having thrombi in blood vessels from pathologies or treatments including, for example, myocardial infarction, unstable angina, atrial fibrillation, stroke, renal damage, percutaneous
translumenal coronary angioplasty, athreosclerosis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, sepsis, endotoxemia (i.e., the presence of endotoxins in the blood);: pulmonary embolism and deep vein thrombosis. In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are
administered to a host having blood clots on the surfaces of artificial organs, shunts and prostheses (for example, artificial heart valves that are implanted into a patient), and in patients that have received an intracoronary stent. In some embodiments, a host is administered an effective amount of a compound described herein due to the formation of clots resulting from some pathological conditions (for example, genetic mutation of VWF cleaving protease, ADAMT13), which may cause spontaneous binding of VWF to platelets resulting in formation of microthrombi in blood vessels leading to thrombotic
thrombocytopenic purpura and other microangiopathy. Microangiopathy is a disease of blood vessels in which the walls of very small blood vessels (capillaries) become so thick and weak that they bleed, leak protein, and slow the flow of blood. In some embodiments, the treatment is in a patient with hemolytic uremic syndrome.
In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an additional anti-platelet agent. Examples of anti-platelet agents include, but are not limited to, aspirin, tirofiban (Aggrastat), Aggrenox, Agrylin, triflusal (Disgren), Flolan, eptifibatide (Integrilin), dipyridamole (Presantine), cilostazol (Pletal), abciximab (ReoPro), and Terutroban. In some embodiments, the Mer TKI and the additional anti- platelet agent act synergistically. In some embodiments, the use of a Mer TKI in combination with an additional anti-platelet agent provides for increased anti -thrombotic or anti-clotting effects without an increase in the standard of care dosage.
In some embodiments, the additional anti-platelet agent is an adenosine diphosphate (ADP) receptor inhibitor. Examples of ADP receptor inhibitors include, but are not limited to, clopidogrel (Plavix), prasugrel (Effient), ticagrelor (Brilinta), ticlopidine (Ticlid), N6- methyl-2'-deoxyadenosine-3',5'-bisphosphate (MRS2179; P2Yl inhibitor), and 2- methylthioadenosine 5 '-monophosphate triethylammonium salt (2-Me-SAMP; P2Yl2 inhibitor).
In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with multiple anti-platelet agents. In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administerd in combination with N6-methyl-2'- deoxyadenosine-3',5'- bisphosphate and 2-methylthioadenosine 5 '-monophosphate triethylammonium salt.
In some embodiments, an active compound disclosed herein is administered in combination with an anti -coagulant. In some embodiments, the anti-coagulant is a heparin composition. In some embodiments, the heparin composition is a low molecular weight heparin composition. Low molecular weight heparin compositions are well known to those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to, tinzaparin, certoparin, pamaparin, nadroparin, ardeparin, enoxaparin, reviparin, dalteparin, and fraxiparin. Additional examples of anticoagulants include, but are not limited to, warfarin (Coumadin), Fragmin, Hep-Lock, Lovenox, and Miradon. e. USE AS NANOPARTICLE COMPOSITIONS OR CARRIERS
In some embodiments, an effective amount of an active compound as described herein is incorporated into nanoparticles, e.g. for convenience of delivery and/or extended release delivery. The use of materials in nanoscale provides one the ability to modify fundamental physical properties such as solubility, diffusivity, blood circulation half- life, drug release characteristics, and immunogenicity. In the last two decades, a number of nanoparticle-based therapeutic and diagnostic agents have been developed for the treatment of cancer, diabetes, pain, asthma, allergy, and infections. These nanoscale agents can provide more effective and/or more convenient routes of administration, lower therapeutic toxicity, extend the product life cycle, and ultimately reduce health-care costs. As therapeutic delivery systems, nanoparticles allow targeted delivery and controlled release. In addition, nanoparticle-based drug delivery can be used to release drugs at a sustained rate and thus lower the frequency of administration, deliver drugs in a target manner to minimize systemic side effects, or deliver two or more drugs simultaneously for combination therapy to generate a synergistic effect and suppress drug resistance. To date, a number of nanotechnology -based therapeutic products have been approved for clinical use. Among these products, liposomal drugs and polymer-based conjugates account for more than 80% of the products. See, Zhang, L., et al., Nanoparticles in Medicine: Therapeutic
Applications and Developments, Clin. Pharm. and Then, 83(5):76l -769, 2008.
Optimal solid lipid nanoparticles (SLN) can be produced in a controlled fashion when a fraction of lipid in the crystalline alpha form can be created and preserved. By doing this, the SLN carrier has a built in trigger mechanism as lipids transform from the alpha to beta form and consequently control drug release. Drug release profiles can be modified according to the composition of the lipid matrix, surfactant concentration and production parameters. See, Muller, R.H., et al., Solid lipid nanoparticles (SLN) for controlled drug delivery - a review of the state of the art, Eur. H. Pharm. Biopharm., 50: 161-177, 2000. Consien et al. have recently disclosed lipid nanoparticles having novel amino-lipids that form lipid nanoparticles and their use for the intracellular delivery of biologically active compounds, e.g., nucleic acids. See, US 8,691,750 to Consien et al.
In regard to controlled release, Kanwar has recently disclosed alginate adsorbed chitosan adsorbed lactoferrin adsorbed calcium phosphate nanoparticles and the controlled release of lactoferrin from the nanoparticles. See, WO 2012/145801 to Kanwar. In addition, Armes et al. have recently disclosed polymer-templated core-shell nanoparticles adapted to facilitate controlled release of at least one active agent into a system in response to controlled changes in the pH of the system. See, US 8,580,311 to Armes, S. et al. incorporated by reference herein.
Petros and DeSimone have recently reviewed strategies in the design of nanoparticles. In addition, the authors reviewed their PRINT (particle replication in non-wetting templates) technology for generating microparticles and nanoparticles. See, Petros, R. A. and DeSimone, I.M., Strategies in the design of nanoparticles for therapeutic applications, Nature
Reviews/Drug Discovery, vol. 9:615-627, 2010. Importantly, the authors disclosed the production of nanoparticles in which a single parameter (shape or size) can be altered independently of all other particle attributes. The authors concluded their paper by outlining several particle characteristics that have emerged as being central to the function of engineered nanoparticles. These parameters include particle size, particle shape, surface characteristics and the ability to release therapeutics. Additional nanoparticle fabrication methods can also be found in US 8,465,775, US 8,444,899, US 8,420,124, US 8,263,129, US 8,158,728 and 8,268,446 all hereby incorporated by reference.
Nanoparticles may be prepared using a wide variety of methods known in the art. For example, nanoparticles can be formed by methods as nanoprecipitation, flow focusing fluidic channels, spray drying, single and double emulsion solvent evaporation, solvent extraction, phase separation, milling, microemulsion procedures, microfabrication, nanofabrication, sacrificial layers, simple and complex coacervation, and other methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Alternatively or additionally, aqueous and organic solvent syntheses for monodisperse semiconductor, conductive, magnetic, organic, and other nanomaterials have been described (Pellegrino et ah, 2005, Small, 1 :48; Murray et ah, 2000, Ann. Rev. Mat. Sci., 30:545; and Trindade et ah, 2001, Chem. Mat., 13:3843). Additional methods have been described in the literature (see, e.g., Doubrow, Ed.,“Microcapsules and Nanoparticles in Medicine and Pharmacy,” CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1992; Mathiowitz et ah, 1987, J. Control. Release, 5: 13; Mathiowitz et ah, 1987, Reactive Polymers, 6:275; and Mathiowitz et ah, 1988, J. Appl. Polymer Sci., 35:755; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,578,325 and
6,007,845; P. Paolicelli et al.,“Surface-modified PLGA-based Nanoparticles that can
Efficiently Associate and Deliver Virus-like Particles” Nanomedicine. 5(6):843-853 (2010)).
In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are associated with a nanoparticle, such as a polymeric nanoparticle. Nanoparticles may comprise natural polymers, including but not limited to chitosan, alginate, dextran, gelatin, and albumin, and synthetic polymers such as, but not limited to, poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), (3- hydroxybutyrate-co-3-hydroxyvalerate) (PHBV), poly(sebacic anhydride), poly(e- caprolactone), polystyrene, thermoresponsive (i.e., NIPAAm and CMCTS-g-PDEA) and pH- responsive (i.e., Eudragit LI 00, Eudragit S and AQOAT AS-MG) polymers.
In some embodiments, the polymeric particle is between about 0.1 nm to about 10000 nm, between about 1 nm to about 1000 nm, between about 10 nm and 1000 nm, between about 100 nm and 800 nm, between about 400 nm and 600 nm, or about 500 nm. In some embodiments, the micro-particles are about 0.1 nm, 0.5 nm, 1.0 nm, 5.0 nm, 10 nm, 25 nm,
50 nm, 75 nm, 100 nm, 150 nm, 200 nm, 250 nm, 300 nm, 400 nm, 450 nm, 500 nm, 550 nm, 600 nm, 650 nm, 700 nm, 750 nm, 800 nm, 850 nm, 900 nm, 950 nm, 1000 nm, 1250 nm, 1500 nm, 1750 nm, or 2000 nm. In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are covalently coupled to a polystyrene particle, PLGA particle, PLA particle, or other nanoparticle.
In some embodiments, the nanoparticle can be solid or hollow and can comprise one or more layers. In some embodiments, each layer has a unique composition and unique properties relative to the other layer(s). To give but one example, the nanoparticle may have a core/shell structure, wherein the core is one layer (e.g. a polymeric core) and the shell is a second layer (e.g. a lipid bilayer or monolayer). In some embodiments, the nanoparticle may comprise a plurality of different layers. In some embodiments, the compounds described herein can be incorporated into or surrounded by one or more layers.
In some embodiments, the nanoparticles comprising the compounds described herein may optionally comprise one or more lipids. In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may comprise a liposome. In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may comprise a lipid bilayer. In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may comprise a lipid monolayer. In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may comprise a micelle. In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may comprise a core comprising a polymeric matrix surrounded by a lipid layer (e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.). In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may comprise a non-polymeric core (e.g., metal particle, quantum dot, ceramic particle, bone particle, viral particle, proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, etc.) surrounded by a lipid layer (e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.).
In other embodiments, the nanoparticle may comprise metal particles, quantum dots, ceramic particles, etc. In some embodiments, a non-polymeric nanoparticle is an aggregate of non-polymeric components, such as an aggregate of metal atoms (e.g., gold atoms).
In some embodiments, nanoparticles may optionally comprise one or more amphiphilic entities. In some embodiments, an amphophilic entity can promote the production of nanoparticles with increased stability, improved uniformity, or increased viscosity. In some embodiments, amphiphilic entities can be associated with the interior surface of a lipid membrane (e.g., lipid bilayer, lipid monolayer, etc.). Many amphiphilic entities known in the art are suitable for use in making nanoparticles useful in the presently described subject matter. Such amphiphilic entities include, but are not limited to, phosphoglycerides; phosphatidylcholines; dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC);
dioleylphosphatidyl ethanolamine (DOPE); dioleyloxypropyltri ethyl ammonium (DOTMA); dioleoylphosphatidylcholine; cholesterol; cholesterol ester; diacylglycerol;
diacylglycerolsuccinate; diphosphatidyl glycerol (DPPG); hexanedecanol; fatty alcohols such as polyethylene glycol (PEG); polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether; a surface active fatty acid, such as palmitic acid or oleic acid; fatty acids; fatty acid monoglycerides; fatty acid diglycerides; fatty acid amides; sorbitan trioleate (Span®85) glycocholate; sorbitan monolaurate (Span®20); polysorbate 20 (Tween®20); polysorbate 60 (Tween®60);
polysorbate 65 (Tween®65); polysorbate 80 (Tween®80); polysorbate 85 (Tween®85); polyoxyethylene monostearate; surfactin; a poloxomer; a sorbitan fatty acid ester such as sorbitan trioleate; lecithin; lysolecithin; phosphatidylserine; phosphatidylinositol;
sphingomyelin; phosphatidylethanolamine (cephalin); cardiolipin; phosphatide acid;
cerebrosides; dicetylphosphate; dipalmitoylphosphatidylglycerol; stearylamine;
dodecylamine; hexadecyl -amine; acetyl palmitate; glycerol ricinoleate; hexadecyl sterate; isopropyl myristate; tyloxapol; poly(ethylene glycol)5000-phosphatidylethanolamine;
polyethylene glycol)400-monostearate; phospholipids; synthetic and/or natural detergents having high surfactant properties; deoxycholates; cyclodextrins; chaotropic salts; ion pairing agents; and combinations thereof. An amphophilic entity component may be a mixture of different amphophilic entities. Those skilled in the art will recognize that this is an exemplary, not comprehensive, list of substances with surfactant activity. Any amphiphilic entity may be used in the production of nanoparticles to be used in accordance with the presently described subject matter.
In some embodiments, a nanoparticle may optionally comprise one or more carbohydrates. Carbohydrates may be natural or synthetic. A carbohydrate may be a derivatized natural carbohydrate. In certain embodiments, a carbohydrate comprises monosaccharide or disaccharide, including but not limited to glucose, fructose, galactose, ribose, lactose, sucrose, maltose, trehalose, cellbiose, mannose, xylose, arabinose, glucoronic acid, galactoronic acid, mannuronic acid, glucosamine, galatosamine, and neuramic acid. In certain embodiments, a carbohydrate is a polysaccharide, including but not limited to pullulan, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC), hydroxycellulose (HC), methylcellulose (C), dextran, cyclodextran, glycogen,
hydroxy ethyl starch, carageenan, glycon, amylose, chitosan, N,0-carboxylmethylchitosan, algin and alginic acid, starch, chitin, inulin, konjac, glucommannan, pustulan, heparin, hyaluronic acid, curdlan, and xanthan. In some embodiments, the nanoparticle does not comprise (or specifically exclude) carbohydrates, such as a polysaccharide. In certain embodiments, the carbohydrate may comprise a carbohydrate derivative such as a sugar alcohol, including but not limited to mannitol, sorbitol, xylitol, erythritol, maltitol, and - lactitol.
In some embodiments, the associated nanoparticle can comprise one or more polymers. In some embodiments, the nanoparticle comprises one or more polymers that are a non-methoxy-terminated, pluronic polymer. In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, or 99% (weight/weight) of the polymers that make up the
nanoparticles are non-methoxy-terminated, pluronic polymers. In some embodiments, all of the polymers that make up the nanoparticle are non-methoxy-terminated, pluronic polymers. In some embodiments, the nanoparticle comprises one or more polymers that are a non- methoxy-terminated polymer. In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, or 99% (weight/weight) of the polymers that make up the nanoparticles are non- methoxy-terminated polymers. In some embodiments, all of the polymers that make up the nanoparticle are non-methoxy-terminated polymers. In some embodiments, the nanoparticle comprises one or more polymers that do not comprise pluronic polymer. In some
embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, or 99% (weight/weight) of the polymers that make up the nanoparticle do not comprise pluronic polymer. In some embodiments, all of the polymers that make up the nanoparticles do not comprise pluronic polymer. In some embodiments, such a polymer can be surrounded by a coating layer (e.g., liposome, lipid monolayer, micelle, etc.). In some embodiments, various elements of the nanoparticle can be coupled with the polymer.
Other examples of polymers include, but are not limited to polyethylenes,
polycarbonates (e.g. poly(l,3-dioxan-2one)), polyanhydrides (e.g. poly(sebacic anhydride)), polypropylfumerates, polyamides (e.g. polycaprolactam), polyacetals, polyethers, polyesters (e.g., polylactide, polyglycolide, polylactide-co-glycolide, polycaprolactone,
polyhydroxyacid (e.g. poly((P-hydroxyalkanoate))), poly(orthoesters), polycyanoacrylates, polyvinyl alcohols, polyurethanes, polyphosphazenes, polyacrylates, polymethacrylates, polyureas, polystyrenes, and polyamines, polylysine, polylysine-PEG copolymers, and poly(ethyleneimine), poly(ethylene imine)-PEG copolymers.
In some embodiments, nanoparticles include polymers which have been approved for use in humans by the ET.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) under 21 C.F.R. §177.2600, including but not limited to polyesters (e.g., polylactic acid, poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid), polycaprolactone, polyvalerolactone, poly(l,3-dioxan-2one)); polyanhydrides (e.g., poly(sebacic anhydride)); polyethers (e.g., polyethylene glycol); polyurethanes;
polymethacrylates; polyacrylates; and polycyanoacrylates.
In some embodiments, polymers can be hydrophilic. For example, polymers may comprise anionic groups (e.g., phosphate group, sulphate group, carboxylate group); cationic groups (e.g., quaternary amine group); or polar groups (e.g., hydroxyl group, thiol group, amine group). In some embodiments, a nanoparticles comprising a hydrophilic polymeric matrix generates a hydrophilic environment within the nanoparticle. In some embodiments, polymers can be hydrophobic. In some embodiments, a nanoparticles comprising a hydrophobic polymeric matrix generates a hydrophobic environment within the nanoparticle. Selection of the hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the polymer may have an impact on the nature of materials that are incorporated (e.g., coupled) within the nanoparticle.
In some embodiments, polymers may be modified with one or more moieties and/or functional groups. A variety of moieties or functional groups can be used in accordance with the presently described subject matter. In some embodiments, polymers may be modified with polyethylene glycol (PEG), with a carbohydrate, and/or with acyclic polyacetals derived from polysaccharides (Papisov, 2001, ACS Symposium Series, 786:301). Certain
embodiments may be made using the general teachings of U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,158 to Gref et al., or WO publication W02009/051837 by Von Andrian et al.
In some embodiments, polymers may be modified with a lipid or fatty acid group. In some embodiments, a fatty acid group may be one or more of butyric, caproic, caprylic, capric, lauric, myristic, palmitic, stearic, arachidic, behenic, or lignoceric acid. In some embodiments, a fatty acid group may be one or more of palmitoleic, oleic, vaccenic, linoleic, alpha-linoleic, gamma-linoleic, arachidonic, gadoleic, arachidonic, eicosapentaenoic, docosahexaenoic, or erucic acid.
In some embodiments, polymers may be one or more acrylic polymers. In certain embodiments, acrylic polymers include, for example, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), methyl methacrylate, polymethacrylate, poly(methyl methacrylate) copolymer, polyacrylamide, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, glycidyl methacrylate copolymers, polycyanoacrylates, and combinations comprising one or more of the foregoing polymers. The acrylic polymer may comprise fully-polymerized copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups.
In some embodiments, polymers can be cationic polymers. In general, cationic polymers are able to condense and/or protect negatively charged strands of nucleic acids (e.g. DNA, or derivatives thereof). Amine-containing polymers such as poly(lysine) (Zauner et al.,
1998, Adv. Drug Del. Rev., 30:97; and Kabanov et al., 1995, Bioconjugate Chem., 6:7), polyethylene imine) (PEI; Boussif et al., 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 1995, 92:7297), and poly(amidoamine) dendrimers (Kukowska-Latallo et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 93:4897; Tang et al., 1996, Bioconjugate Chem., 7:703; and Haensler et al., 1993, Bioconjugate Chem., 4:372) are positively-charged at physiological pH, form ion pairs with nucleic acids, and mediate transfection in a variety of cell lines. In embodiments, the nanoparticles may not comprise (or may exclude) cationic polymers.
In some embodiments, polymers can be degradable polyesters bearing cationic side chains (Putnam et al., 1999, acromolecules, 32:3658; Barrera et al., 1993, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 115: 11010; Kwon et al., 1989, Macromolecules, 22:3250; Lim et al., 1999, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121 :5633; and Zhou et al., 1990, Macromolecules, 23:3399). Examples of these polyesters include poly(L-lactide-co-L4ysine) (Barrera et al., 1993, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 115: 11010), poly(serine ester) (Zhou et al., 1990, Macromolecules, 23:3399), poly(4- hydroxy-L-proline ester) (Putnam et al., 1999, Macromolecules, 32:3658; and Lim et al.,
1999, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121 :5633), and poly(4-hydroxy-L-proIine ester) (Putnam et al., 1999, Macromolecules, 32:3658; and Lim et al., 1999, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121 :5633).
The properties of these and other polymers and methods for preparing them are well known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,123,727; 5,804,178; 5,770,417;
5,736,372; 5,716,404; 6,095,148; 5,837,752; 5,902,599; 5,696,175; 5,514,378; 5,512,600; 5,399,665; 5,019,379; 5,010,167; 4,806,621; 4,638,045; and 4,946,929; Wang et al., 2001, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 123:9480; Lim et al., 2001, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 123:2460; Langer, 2000, Acc. Chem. Res., 33:94; Langer, 1999, J. Control. Release, 62:7; and Uhrich et al., 1999, Chem. Rev., 99:3181). More generally, a variety of methods for synthesizing certain suitable polymers are described in Concise Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Polymeric Amines and Ammonium Salts, Ed. by Goethals, Pergamon Press, 1980; Principles of Polymerization by Odian, John Wiley & Sons, Fourth Edition, 2004; Contemporary Polymer Chemistry by Allcock et al., Prentice-Hall, 1981; Deming et al., 1997, Nature, 390:386; and in U.S. Pat.
Figure imgf000087_0001
Polymers can be linear or branched polymers. In some embodiments, polymers can be dendrimers. In some embodiments, polymers can be substantially cross-linked to one another. In some embodiments, polymers can be substantially free of cross-links. In some
embodiments, polymers can be used without undergoing a cross-linking step. It is further to be understood that a nanoparticle may comprise block copolymers, graft copolymers, blends, mixtures, and/or adducts of any of the foregoing and other polymers. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the polymers listed herein represent an exemplary, not comprehensive, list of polymers that can be of use in accordance with the presently described subject matter.
The compounds of the presently described subject matter can be coupled to a nanoparticle by any of a number of methods. Generally, the coupling can be a result of bonding between the compound and the nanoparticle. This bonding can result in the compound being attached to the surface of the nanoparticle and/or contained within
(encapsulated) the nanoparticle. In some embodiments, however, the compounds are encapsulated by the nanoparticle as a result of the structure of the nanoparticle rather than bonding to the nanoparticle. In some embodiments, the nanoparticle comprises a polymer as provided herein, and the compounds described herein are coupled to the nanoparticle. The compounds described herein may be encapsulated into nanoparticles as desirable using a variety of methods including but not limited to C. Astete et ah,“Synthesis and
characterization of PLGA nanoparticles” J. Biomater. Sci. Polymer Edn, Vol. 17, No. 3, pp. 247-289 (2006); K. Avgoustakis“Pegylated Poly(Lactide) and Poly(Lactide-Co-Glycolide) Nanoparticles: Preparation, Properties and Possible Applications in Drug Delivery” Current Drug Delivery 1 :32l -333 (2004); C. Reis et ah,“Nanoencapsulation I. Methods for preparation of drug-loaded polymeric nanoparticles” Nanomedicine 2:8-21 (2006); P.
Paolicelli et ah,“Surface-modified PLGA-based Nanoparticles that can Efficiently Associate and Deliver Virus-like Particles” Nanomedicine. 5(6):843-853 (2010). Other methods suitable for encapsulating the compounds described herein may be used, including without limitation methods disclosed in ET.S. Pat. No. 6,632,671 to Linger Oct. 14, 2003.
In certain embodiments, nanoparticles are prepared by a nanoprecipitation process or spray drying. Conditions used in preparing nanoparticles may be altered to yield particles of a desired size or property (e.g., hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, external morphology, “stickiness,” shape, etc.). The method of preparing the nanoparticles and the conditions (e.g., solvent, temperature, concentration, air flow rate, etc.) used may depend on the materials to be coupled to the nanoparticles and/or the composition of the polymer matrix. If particles prepared by any of the above methods have a size range outside of the desired range, particles can be sized, for example, using a sieve.
In some embodiments of the presently described subject matter, PRINT technology is used to manufacture nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein.
In some embodiments, provided herein are liposome based nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein. In some embodiments, a liposome based nanoparticle comprises a compound described herein formulated for controlled-release.
In some embodiments, provided herein are polymer based nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein. In some embodiments, provided herein are polymer based nanoparticles comprising a compound described herein formulated for controlled-release.
In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of albumin and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of a polysaccharide and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of a metal and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of gold and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of iron oxide and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of silicon and a compound described herein.
In regard to polymers used for the production of nanoparticles, several reviews are available. See, for example, Soppimath, .S., et al., Biodegradable polymeric nanoparticles as drug delivery devices, J. Controlled Release, 70: 1-20, 2001, Agnihotri, S.A., et al., Recent advances on chitosan-based micro- and nanoparticle delivery, J. Controlled Release, l00(l):5- 28, 2004, Ganta, S, et al., A review of stimuli-responsive nanocarriers for drug and gene delivery, J. Controlled Release, 126(3): 187-204, 2008, Danhier, F. et al., PLGA-based nanoparticles: An overview of biomedical applications, J. Controlled Release, 161(2):505- 522, 2012,
In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of L-glutamic acid copolymers and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of L- alanine copolymers and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of L-lysine copolymers and a compound described herein. In some
embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of L-tyrosine copolymers and a compound described herein. In other embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of poly(lactic-co- glycolic acid) and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of methoxy-PEG-poly(D,L-lactide) and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of HPMA copolymer and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of polycyclodextran and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of polyglutamate and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of poly(iso-hexyl-cyanoacrylate) and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of poly-L-lysine and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are comprised of PEG and a compound described herein. In some embodiments, nanoparticles are made of combinations of polymers and a compound described herein.
In some embodiments, a compound described herein is released from a nanoparticle over a period of between about 1 and about 90 days. In some embodiments, the compound is released over a period of about 3 to 28 days. In some embodiments, the compound is released over a period of about 5 to 21 days.
2. METHODS OF TREATING A DISORDER
In some embodiments, disclosed are methods for the treatment of a disorder associated with any one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase in a subject, the method comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, thereby treating the disorder. In some embodiments, the disorder is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
Also disclosed are methods of treating a tumor in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition. In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the tumor prior to the administering step. In further embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the tumor.
In some embodiments, the tumor is MerTK +/+. In other embodiments, the tumor is MerTK -/-.
Also disclosed are methods of treating a cancer in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition. In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the cancer prior to the administering step. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the cancer.
In some embodiments, the cancer is MerTK +/+. In some embodiments, the cancer is
MerTK -/-. Also disclosed are methods of treating an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition. In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the immunosuppressed
microenvironment prior to the administering step. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the immunosuppressed microenvironment.
Also disclosed are methods of treating a thrombotic disorder in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a disclosed compound or composition. In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for anti thrombotic therapy prior to the administering step. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of anti -thrombotic therapy.
In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal is a human.
In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the disorder.
In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
In some embodiments, the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In some embodiments, the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.
In some embodiments, the disorder is a cancer, an infection, a fibrosis, a thrombotic disorder, or a clotting disorder.
In some embodiments, the disorder is an infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a viral infection. In further embodiments, the viral infection has a virion envelope phosphatidyl serine.
In some embodiments, the disorder is associated with an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
In some embodiments, the disorder is a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation. In some embodiments, the disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation is cancer. In some embodiments, the cancer is selected from breast cancer, cervical cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, colorectal cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer, pancreatic cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, glioma, leukemia, lymphoma, chronic myeloproliferative disorder, myelodysplastic syndrome,
myeloproliferative neoplasm, and plasma cell neoplasm (myeloma). In further embodiments, the cancer is MerTK +/+. In some embodiments, the cancer is MerTK -/-.
In some embodiments, the disorder is a thrombotic disorder or a clotting disorder. Examples of thrombotic disorders include, but are not limited to, myocardial infarction, deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, and stroke.
In some embodiments, the disorder is a liver disorder. Examples of liver disorders include, but are not limited to, alcohol-related liver diseases, cirrhosis, non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, hepatitis, haemochromatosis, and primary biliary cirrhosis.
In some embodiments, the disorder is associated with any one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase. In some embodiments, the disorder is associated with any one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In further embodiments, the disorder is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase.
3. METHODS OF TREATING AN INFECTION
In some embodiments, disclosed are methods for the treatment of an infection in a subject, the method comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, thereby treating the infection.
In some embodiments, the infection is a viral infection or a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a bacterial infection. In some embodiments, the infection is a viral infection. In further embodiments, the viral infection has a virion envelope phosphatidyl serine.
In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal is a human.
In some embodiments, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the infection prior to the administering step. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the infection.
In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering an effective amount of an antiviral agent to the subject.
In some embodiments, the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In some embodiments, the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with any one or more of Mer,
Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with Mer tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with Tyro3 tyrosine kinase dysfunction. In some embodiments, the infection is associated with Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction.
4. METHODS OF INHIBITING A TAM TYROSINE KINASE IN AT LEAST ONE CELL
In some embodiments, disclosed are methods for inhibiting a TAM tyrosine kinase
(comprising one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl) in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, thereby treating the infection.
In some embodiments, the cell is mammalian. In some embodiments, the cell is human. In some embodiments, the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
In some embodiments, contacting is via administration to a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for inhibiting a TAM tyrosine kinase prior to the administering step. In some embodiments, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a disorder related to dysfunction of a TAM tyrosine kinase prior to the administering step.
In some embodiments, inhibiting Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinase is associated with treating a cancer. In further embodiments, inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase is associated with treating a cancer.
In some embodiments, the compound exhibits inhibition of Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinase with an IC50 of less than about 30 mM, less than about 25 pM, less than about 20 pM, less than about 15 pM, less than about 10 pM, less than about 5 pM, less than about 1 pM, or less than about 0.5 pM.
5. MANUFACTURE OF A MEDICAMENT
In some embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder in a subject, the method comprising combining an effective amount of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
In some embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for treating an infection in a subject, the method comprising combining an effective amount of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
As regards these applications, the present method includes the administration to an animal, particularly a mammal, and more particularly a human, of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound effective in the inhibition of Mer, Tyro3, and/or Axl tyrosine kinase. The dose administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the presently described subject matter should be sufficient to affect a therapeutic response in the animal over a reasonable time frame. One skilled in the art will recognize that dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the condition of the animal and the body weight of the animal.
The total amount of the compound of the present disclosure administered in a typical treatment is preferably between about 10 mg/kg and about 1000 mg/kg of body weight for mice, and between about 100 mg/kg and about 500 mg/kg of body weight, and more preferably between 200 mg/kg and about 400 mg/kg of body weight for humans per daily dose. This total amount is typically, but not necessarily, administered as a series of smaller doses over a period of about one time per day to about three times per day for about 24 months, and preferably over a period of twice per day for about 12 months.
The size of the dose also will be determined by the route, timing and frequency of administration as well as the existence, nature and extent of any adverse side effects that might accompany the administration of the compound and the desired physiological effect. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that various conditions or disease states, in particular chronic conditions or disease states, may require prolonged treatment involving multiple administrations.
Thus, in some embodiments, the subject matter described herein relates to the manufacture of a medicament comprising combining a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
6. KITS
In some embodiments, disclosed are kits comprising at least one compound of Formula I and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to increase one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity; (b) at least one agent known to treat a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; (c) at least one antibacterial agent; (d) at least one antiviral agent; (e) instructions for treating a disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction; (f) instructions for treating a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; or (g) instructions for treating an infection.
In other embodiments, disclosed are kits comprising at least one compound of Formula II and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to increase one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase activity; (b) at least one agent known to treat a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; (c) at least one antibacterial agent; (d) at least one antiviral agent; (e) instructions for treating a disorder associated with one or more of Mer, Tyro3, and Axl tyrosine kinase dysfunction; (f) instructions for treating a disorder of uncontrolled cellular proliferation; or (g) instructions for treating an infection.
In some embodiments, the at least one compound and the at least one agent are co- formulated. In some embodiments, the at least one compound and the at least one agent are co-packaged.
The kits can also comprise compounds and/or products co-packaged, co-formulated, and/or co-delivered with other components. For example, a drug manufacturer, a drug reseller, a physician, a compounding shop, or a pharmacist can provide a kit comprising a disclosed compound and/or product and another component for delivery to a patient.
It is understood that the disclosed kits can be prepared from the disclosed compounds, products, and pharmaceutical compositions. It is also understood that the disclosed kits can be employed in connection with the disclosed methods of using.
All publications and patent applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference, and for any and all purposes, as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. In the event of an inconsistency between the present disclosure and any
publications or patent application incorporated herein by reference, the present disclosure controls. Nothing herein is to be construed as an admission that the presently disclosed subject matter is not entitled to antedate such publication by virtue of prior discovery.
F. EXAMPLES
The following preparations and examples are given to enable those skilled in the art to more clearly understand and to practice the presently described subject matter. They should not be considered as limiting the scope of the subject matter described herein, but merely as being illustrative and representative.
1. GENERAL EXPERIMENTAL METHODS
All solvents were purchased from Sigma-Aldrich (anhydrous grade), VWR
International, or Fisher Scientific. All non-aqueous reactions were performed in flame-dried or oven dried round-bottomed flasks under an atmosphere of nitrogen or argon. Reaction temperatures were controlled using a thermocouple thermometer and analog hotplate stirrer. Reactions were conducted at room temperature (r.t., approximately 23 °C) unless otherwise noted. Analytical thin-layer chromatography (TLC) was performed on E. Merck silica gel 60 F254 plates and visualized using UV, ceric ammonium molybdate, potassium permanganate, and anisaldehyde stains. Yields were reported as isolated, spectroscopically pure compounds.
'H NMR spectra were recorded on Varian 400 MHz spectrometers and are reported relative to deuterated solvent signals. Data for 'H NMR spectra are reported as follows: chemical shift (5 ppm), multiplicity (s = singlet, d = doublet, t = triplet, dd= double of doublets, dt = doublet of triplets, q = quartet, m = multiplet, br = broad, app = apparent), coupling constants (Hz), and integration. LC/MS was conducted and recorded on an Agilent Technologies 6110 Quadrupole instrument.
Microfluidic Capillary Electrophoresis (MCE) assays were performed in accordance with the procedure set forth in Zhang et al. ( JMed Chem 2013. 56 (23), 9683-9692), which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Activity assays were performed in a 384 well, polypropylene microplate in a final volume of 50 pL of 50 mM Hepes, Ph 7.4 containing 10 mM MgCh, 1.0 mM DTT, 0.01% Triton X-100, 0.1% Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), containing 1.0 pM fluorescent substrate and ATP at the Km for each enzyme. All reactions were terminated by addition of 20 pL of 70 mM EDTA. After a 180 min incubation, phosphorylated and unphosphorylated substrate peptides were separated in buffer supplemented with 1 x CR-8 on a LabChip EZ Reader equipped with a l2-sipper chip. Data were analyzed using EZ Reader software. The assay conditions for the MCE assays are shown below in Table 1.
Table 1
Kinase Peptide Substrate Kinase (nM) ATP (uM)
Mer 5 -F AM-EFPIYDFLP AKKK-CONH2 2Ό 5Ό
Axl 5 -F AM-KKKKEEIYFFF -CONH2 120 65
Tyro 5-F AM-EFPIYDFLP AKKK-CONH2 10 21
2. CHEMISTRY EXPERIMENTALS
A. EXAMPLE 1
Figure imgf000097_0001
trans-4-((2-((4-Fluorovhenyl)amino)-5-(4-(vwrolidin-l-ylmethyl)vhenyl)vwimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol and (2, 6-dimethylvyridin-4-yl)(4-(2-((4-fluorovhenyl)amino)-4- ((trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)vyrimidin-5-yl)viyeridin-l-yl)methanone
To a suspension of /ra//.v-4-((5-bromo-2-chloropyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexan- 1 -ol (30.6 g, 100 mmol) and 4-fluoroaniline (14.1 mL, 150 mmol) in MeCN (350 mL) was added a 4.0 M HC1 solution in l,4-dioxane (90 mL, 360 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated under reflux overnight. After cooled to room temperature, the suspension was filtered, and the precipitate was washed with CH2CI2 (2X). The filtrate was concentrated to provide the HC1 salt of the desired compound /ra//.s-4-((5-bromo-2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol as a pale white solid (42 g, 100%). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+
(Ci6Hi9BrFN40+): calcd. m/z 381.06; found m/z 381.10.
To a solution of /ra//.s-4-((5-bromo-2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino) cyclohexan-l-ol (400 mg, 1.049 mmol) and fe/7-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine- 1 (2//)-carboxylate (0.486 g, 1.573 mmol) in 1,4- dioxane (8 mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.435 g, 3.147 mmol) in water (2.0 mL) and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine)palladium(O) (0.121 g, 0.104 mmol). The mixture was heated at 100 °C under microwave irradiation for 1 h. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc and washed with water. The organic phase was combined, dried (Na2S04), and concentrated. The residue was purified by ISCO (0 -100% EtOAc in hexane) to provide the desire compound tert- butyl 4-(2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine - 1 (2//)-carboxylate (500 mg, 98%). A solution of compound /er/-butyl 4-(2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine-l(2//)-carboxylate (500 mg, 1.033 mmol) in MeOH (250 mL) was added palladium on carbon (500 mg, 4.698 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere at 45 °C overnight and was filtered through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated to yield the desired product /c/V-butyl 4- (2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((/ra//.s-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino) pyrimidin-5- yl)piperidine-l-carboxylate (400 mg, 0.823 mmol) (430 mg, 86%).1H NMR (400 MHz, cd3od) d 7.64-7.55 (m, 3H), 7.04 - 6.94 (m, 2H), 4.18 (d, J= 13.2 Hz, 2H), 4.08-3.96 (m, 1H), 3.63-3.51 (m, 1H), 2.89 (s, 2H), 2.69-2.52 (m, 1H), 2.11-1.95 (m, 4H), 1.84-1.72 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.30 (m, 15H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (CieHsvFNsC ): calcd. m/z 486.28; found m/z 486.30; LC-MS: >95% purity.
tert- Butyl 4-(2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((/ra ,-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino) pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidine-l-carboxylate (400 mg, 0.823 mmol) was add a 4.0 M HC1 solution in dioxane (10 mL, 40 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, then was added diethyl ether. The solid was filtered and yield the desired product trans- 4-((2- ((4-fuorophenyl)amino)-5-(4-(pyrrolidin-l-ylmethyl)phenyl)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol as an off white solid (313 mg, 90%). ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) d 7.59-7.44 (m, 3H), 7.23 - 7.12 (m, 2H), 4.12-4.00 (m, 1H), 3.62-3.43 (m, 3H), 3.26-3.13 (m, 2H), 3.05-2.95 (m, 1H), 2.11-1.92 (m, 6H), 1.87-1.76 (m, 2H), 1.64-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.41- 1.28 (m, 2H). 13C NMR (lOOMHz, CD3OD) d 160.43 (d, J= 242 Hz), 160.34, 151.23,
136.87, 132.50, 124.94, 115.42 (d, J= 23 Hz), 113.54, 68.86, 51.07, 43.81, 33.70, 29.96, 29.18, 27.48. MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C21H29FN5CE): calcd. m/z 386.23; found m/z 386.25; LC-MS: >95% purity.
To a solution of /ra//.s-4-((2-((4-fuorophenyl)amino)-5-(4-(pyrrolidin- l - ylmethyl)phenyl) pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (45 mg, 0.106 mmol) and 2,6- dimethylisonicotinic acid (0.019 g, 0.127 mmol) in DMF (0.5 ml) was added HATLT (0.081 g, 0.213 mmol) and DIPEA (0.074 g, 0.1 mL, 0.572 mmol). The reaction mixture was ultrasonicated for 15 min, then was purified by HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water + 0. l%TFA) to yield a TFA salt of the desired product, which was treated with a 4.0 M HC1 aqueous solution and concentrated to yield the HC1 salt of the desire product (2,6-dimethylpyridin-4-yl)(4-(2- ((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidin-l- yl)methanone (43 mg, 64%) as an off-white solid. ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) d 7.73 (s, 2H), 7.55-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.18 (t, J= 8.7 Hz, 2H), 4.76 (d, J= 13.5 Hz, 1H), 4.09-4.01 (m, 1H), 3.65-3.52 (m, 2H), 3.39-3.33 (m, 1H), 3.06-2.90 (m, 2H), 2.78 (s, 6H), 2.05-1.90 (m, 5H), 1.84-1.75 (m, 1H), 1.68-1.50 (m, 4H), 1.36-1.25 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C29H36FN602 +): calcd. m/z 519.28; found m/z 519.30.; LC-MS: >95% purity.
B. EXAMPLE 2
Figure imgf000099_0001
trans-4-((5-(l-(Cvclohexylmethyl)piperidin-4-yl)-2-((4-fiuorophenyl)amino)pwimidin- 4-yl)amino)cyclohexan-l -ol
A solution of /ra//.s-4-((2-((4-fuorophenyl)amino)-5-(4-(pyrrolidin- l -yl methyl )phenyl) pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (30 mg, 0.071 mmol) in CH2CI2 (0.5 ml) was added cyclohexanecarbaldehyde (0.022 g, 0.21 mmol), sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.060 g, 0.28 mmol), and acetic acid (4.070 pL, 0.071 mmol). The reaction mixture was under ultra- sonication for 20 min, filtered, and purified by HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water) to provide the TFA salt of the desired product, which was treated with a 4.0 M HC1 aqueous solution, ultrasonicated, and concentrated to yield the HC1 salt of the desire product trans- 4-((5-(l- (cyclohexylmethyl)piperidin-4-yl)-2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (33 mg, 84%) as an off-white solid. ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CD30D) d 7.54-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.18 (dd, J= 9.7, 7.7 Hz, 2H), 4.12-4.02 (m, 1H), 3.70 (d, J= 12.6 Hz, 2H), 3.62-3.54 (m, 1H), 3.17-3.06 (m, 2H), 3.05-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.99-2.91 (m, 1H), 2.12- 1.91 (m, 8H), 1.88-1.69 (m, 6H), 1.62-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.41-1.24 (m, 5H), 1.13-1.04 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C28H4IFN50+): calcd. m/z 482.32; found m/z 483.35.; LC-MS: >95% purity.
C. EXAMPLE 3
Figure imgf000099_0002
trans-4-((2-((4-fluorovhenyl)amino)-5-(l-(methylsulfonyl)viyeridin-4-yl)vyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexanol To a mixture of /ra//.s-4-((2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-5-(piperidin-4-j7)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexanol (40 mg, 0.10 mmol) and triethylamine (31 mg, 0.30 mmol) in THF (15 mL) was added methanesulfonyl chloride (15 mg, 0.13 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified with prep-HPLC (0-50% MeOH/water) to provide the desired product /m«5-4-((2-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-5-(l -(methylsulfonyl)piperidin-4- y/)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexanol (34 mg, 70%) as a white solid. ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) d 7.51-7.44 (m, 3H), 7.21-7.13 (m, 2H), 4.09-3.98 (m, 1H), 3.83 (d, J= 12.2 Hz, 2H), 3.60-3.50 (m, 1H), 2.92-2.89 (m, 1H), 2.87 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1H), 2.85 (s, 3H), 2.84 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 1H), 2.76-2.65 (m, 1H), 1.96 (dd, J= 28.6, 13.8 Hz, 7H), 1.68-1.45 (m, 4H), 1.36-
1.25 (m, 3H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C22H3IFN503S+): calcd. m/z 464.2; found m/z 464.2.; LC-MS: >95% purity.
D. EXAMPLE 4
Figure imgf000100_0001
trans-4-((5-(l-Methylpiperidin-4-yl)-2-((4-(phenylethvnyl)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cvclohexanol
To a mixture of 5-bromo-4-chloropyrimidin-2-amine (1.0 g, 4.80 mmol) and trans-4- aminocyclohexanol (608 mg, 5.28 mmol) in DMA (20 mL) was added ZV-ethyl-ZV- isopropylpropan -2-amine (744 mg, 5.76 mmol) and K2CO3 (1.33 g, 9.60 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 160 °C for 4 h and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography with pre-packed silica gel disposable column to provide the desired product /ra//.s-4-((2-amino-5-bromopyrimidin-4- yl)amino)cyclohexanol (1.0 g, 73%) as a white solid.
To a solution of /ra//.s-4-((2-amino-5-bromopyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexanol (] o g, 3.48 mmol) and tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-5,6- dihydropyridine- 1 (2//)-carboxylate (1.18 g, 3.83 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (30 mL) was added K2CO3 (1.44 mg, 10.4 mmol) in water (10.0 mL) and Pd(PPh3)4 (201 mg, 0.17 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated under nitrogen atmosphere at 90 °C for 3 h, quenched with water, and extracted with EtOAc (3^ 10 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na2S04) and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography with pre- packed silica gel disposable column to yield the desired product tert-butyl 4-(2-amino-4- ((/ra//.s-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)-5,6-dihydropyridine- l (2//)-carboxylate (1.14 mg, 84%) as a yellow solid.
To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(2-amino-4-((/ra«5-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)-5,6-dihydropyridine-l(2//)-carboxylate (1.14 g, 2.93 mmol) in MeOH (40 mL) was added Pd/C (171 mg, 15%). The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere at room temperature overnight, then passed through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated under the reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography with pre-packed silica gel disposable column to yield the desired product, tert-butyl 4-(2-amino-4-((/ra//.s-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5- yl)piperidine-l-carboxylate (1.04 g, 91%), as a white solid.
To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(2-amino-4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidine-l-carboxylate (305 mg, 0.78
mmol) and l-bromo-4-(phenylethynyl)benzene (100 mg, 0.39 pmol) in toluene (30 mL) was added Xantphos (6.75 mg, 11.7 pmol) and Sodium tert-butoxide (74.7 mg, 0.78 mmol). Then, Pd2(dba)3 (7.12 mg, 7.78 pmol) was added. The mixture was heated at 100 °C for 12 h under nitrogen atmosphere. Once deemed complete by TLC, the reaction mixture was cooled and filtered through a pad of Celite. Then, water (30 mL) and ethyl acetate (30 mL) were added, and the layers were separated. The water layer was extracted by ethyl acetate (15 mLx 3) and the combined organic phase was concentrated and purified with a pre-packed silica gel disposable column to yield the desired product, /er/-butyl 4-(4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)-2-((4-(phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidine-l- carboxylate (94 mg, 43%), as a light-yellow solid.
To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(4-((/ra//.s-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)arnino)-2-((4- (phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-5-yl)piperidine-l-carboxylate (94 mg, 0.17 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) was added a 4.0 M solution of HC1 in dioxane (3.0 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, and then concentrated. The residue was purified with prep-HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water) to yield the desired product (/ra//.s-4-((2-((4- (phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)-5-(piperidin-4-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexanol (70 mg, 90%) as a pale white solid.
To a solution of (/ra//.s-4-((2-((4-(phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)-5-(piperidin-4- yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexanol (25 mg, 0.053 mmol) in CH2CI2 (10 mL) was added acetic acid (3.2 mg, 0.053 mmol), sodium triacetoxyborohydride (23 mg, 0.11 mmol), and formaldehyde (15 mg, 0.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was ultrasonicated for 15 min, then was added MeOH and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and purified with prep-HPLC (0-50% MeCN/water) to provide /ra//.s-4-((5-( l -methylpiperidin-4-yl)-2-((4- (phenylethynyl)phenyl)amino)pyrimidin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexanol as a white solid. 'H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) d 7.63-7.53 (m, 5H), 7.52-7.46 (m, 2H), 7.40-7.32 (m, 3H), 4.16-4.06 (m, 1H), 3.65-3.54 (m, 3H), 3.17 (t, J= 12.0 Hz, 2H), 3.02-2.93 (m, 1H), 2.91 (s, 3H), 2.14- 1.97 (m, 6H), 1.87 (td, J= 15.2, 3.6 Hz, 2H), 1.68-1.54 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.31 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [ M + H ] P CL 0 Hi 5 N 5 O N : calcd. m/z 481.3; found m/z 482.3.
The compounds in Table 2 were prepared following procedures identical or analogous to those described in Examples 1-4. The requisite starting materials were commercially available, described in the literature, or readily synthesized by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Table 2 also illustrates the effects of the compounds on Mer tyrosine kinase.
NOTE: ++++ means < 10 nM; +++ means between 10-100 nM; ++ means between 100 nM-l mM; + means between 1-30 pM; - means inactive.
Table 2 Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000103_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+l) or/and Ή NMR
1H), 2.94-2.80 (m, 2H), 2.79-2.69 (m, 1H), 2.14-1.72 (m, 14H), 1.61- 1.28 (m, 6H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C28H37F3N502+): calcd. m/z 532.28; found m/z 532.30. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000104_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+l) or/and Ή NMR
1H), 3.17-3.01 (m, 3H), 2.95-2.84 (m, 4H), 2.77 (t, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 2.09-1.83 (m, 10H), 1.66-1.50 (m, 3H), 1.43-1.26 (m, 3H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C28H4OFN602+): calcd. m/z 511.31; found m/z 511.35. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000105_0003
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
1.87-1.76 (m, 2H), 1.64-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.41-1.28 (m, 2H). 13C NMR (lOOMHz, CD3OD) d 160.43 ( d, J = 242 Hz), 160.34, 151.23, 136.87, 132.50, 124.94, 115.42 (d, J = 23 Hz), 113.54, 68.86, 51.07, 43.81, 33.70, 29.96, 29.18, 27.48. MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C21H29FN5CE): calcd. m/z 386.23.
Figure imgf000105_0001
1H), 3.27-3.17 (m, 1H), 3.12-3.01
(m, 1H), 2.86 (tt, j = 11.8, 3.1 Hz, 1H), 2.73 (td, J = 13.1, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 2.04-1.81 (m, 8H), 1.78-1.66 (m, 4H), 1.63-1.57 (m, 2H), 1.54 (d, J = 13.4 Hz, 2H), 1.50-1.27 (m, 4H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C27H37FN502+): calcd. m/z 482.29; found m/z 482.20.
Figure imgf000105_0002
), . - . (m, ), . - .
(m, 1H), 2.03 (dd, J= 23.3, 12.0 Hz, 4H), 1.89 (d, J= 11.7 Hz, 2H), 1.84- 1.71 (m, 2H), 1.57-1.40 (m, 3H), 1.03 (qd, J= 13.3, 3.1 Hz, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C22H31FN5CE): calcd. m/z 400.30; found m/z 400.24. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000106_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000107_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
3.00-2.89 (m, 1H), 2.07 (d, J= 12.9 Hz, 6H), 1.83-1.70 (m, 2H), 1.68- 1.55 (m, 2H), 1.54-1.42 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (Ci8H2vN6OS+): calcd. m/z 375.19; found m/z 375.20. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000108_0002
IC50 MS m/z (M+l) or/and Ή NMR
, , , , , 7.30 (d, 7 = 8.9 Hz, 1H), 4.38-4.28 (m, 1H), 3.66-3.51 (m, 3H), 3.20 (td, J= 13.0, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 3.08-2.99 (m, 1H), 2.14 (d, J= 14.2 Hz, 2H), 2.04 (d, 7 = 10.1 Hz, 4H), 1.92-1.77 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.56 (m, 2H), 1.48-1.35 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C24H31N6CE): calcd. m/z 419.25; found m/z 419.25.
Figure imgf000108_0001
2.92-2.86 (m, 1H), 2.10-1.83 (m,
8H), 1.58-1.48 (m, 2H), 1.29 (t, 7 = 11.7 Hz, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C28H35FN5CE): calcd. m/z 476.27; found m/z 476.30. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000109_0002
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
(m, 1H), 3.68 (d, j = 12.6 Hz, 2H), 3.60-3.52 (m, 1H), 3.40-3.32 (m, 2H), 3.04-2.95 (m, 1H), 2.13-2.07 (m, 2H), 2.03-1.94 (m, 5H), 1.62-
I.53 (m, 2H), 1.39-1.24 (m, 3H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C27H33FN6CE): calcd. m/z 477.27; found m/z 477.30.
Figure imgf000109_0001
(m, 1H), 2.15-1.83 (m, 8H), 1.83- 1.71 (m, 2H), 1.66-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.51-1.38 (m, 2H), 1.38-1.25 (m, 2H), 1.01 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C25H37FN5CE): calcd. m/z 442.29; found m/z 442.30. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000110_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+l) or/and Ή NMR
(m, 2H), 3.16 (t, J = 11.7 Hz, 2H), 3.09 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.05-2.93 (m, 1H), 2.28-2.12 (m, 1H), 2.12-
1.92 (m, 8H), 1.78 (d, j = 12.3 Hz, 2H), 1.66-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.47-1.26 (m, 4H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C27H39FN502 +): calcd. m/z 484.30; found m/z 484.30. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000111_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+l) or/and Ή NMR
2.98 (m, 3H), 2.88 (s, 3H), 2.35-2.07 (m, 6H), 2.05-1.85 (m, 5H), 1.68- 1.54 (m, 4H), 1.36-1.27 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C28H42FN6CE): calcd. m/z 497.33; found m/z 497.35. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000112_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+l) or/and Ή NMR
(m, 5H), 1.45-1.30 (m, 6H), 1.30- 1.21 (m, 4H), 1.14-1.02 (m, 2H), 0.96 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 3H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C27H48N5CE): calcd. m/z 440.27; found m/z 440.30.
Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000113_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
, , ,
(m, 8H), 1.91-1.59 (m, 8H), 1.53 (dd, 14.3, 7.1 Hz, 2H), 1.44-1.30 (m, 4H), 1.30-1.18 (m, 1H), 1.13- 1.02 (m, 2H), 0.80-0.71 (m, 1H), 0.52-0.47 (m, 2H), 0.11 (q, j = 4.9 Hz, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C27H46N5CE): calcd. m/z 456.36; found m/z 456.00. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000114_0003
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
, , , , 2H), 3.03-2.92 (m, 1H), 2.91 (s, 2H), 2.09 (d, J= 14.0 Hz, 2H), 1.99 (d, J = 10.1 Hz, 2H), 1.95-1.81 (m, 4H), 1.62-1.40 (m, 3H), 1.27 (s, 2H), 1.09-0.95 (m, 2H), 0.93-0.79 (m, 1H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C23H33FN5CE): calcd. m/z 414.2; found m/z 414.2.
Figure imgf000114_0001
2H), 3.02-2.93 (m, 1H), 2.90 (s,
3H), 2.34 (s, 3H), 2.09 (d, j = 14.2 Hz, 2H), 1.99 (t, J = 11.8 Hz, 4H), 1.86 (td, J= 15.0, 3.2 Hz, 2H), 1.65-
1.52 (m, 2H), 1.39-1.26 (m, 4H), 0.92-0.80 (m, 1H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]7C23H34N50N: calcd. m/z 396.2; found m/z 396.2.
Figure imgf000114_0002
j = 11.8 Hz, 2H), 2.91 (s, 3H), 2.09
(d, 7= 13.9 Hz, 2H), 1.98 (t, 7= 11.2 Hz, 4H), 1.89-1.75 (m, 2H), 1.63- 1.47 (m, 2H), 1.37-1.29 (m, 2H), 1.27 (s, 3H), 0.9-0.82 (m, 1H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C23H34N502 +): calcd. m/z 412.2; found m/z 412.2. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000115_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
3.25 (d, 7= 11.1 Hz, 2H), 3.18-3.05 (m, 1H), 2.93 (s, 3H), 2.76 (s, 3H), 2.30 (s, 2H), 2.24-2.05 (m, 4H), 1.98-1.84 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.63 (m, 5H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C3OH4OFN6 +): calcd. m/z 503.32; found m/z 503.30. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000116_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000117_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
, , , , , 7.1, 1.1 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (dd, 7 = 8.9, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 4.37-4.28 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.56 (m, 3H), 3.26-3.16 (m, 2H), 3.10-3.00 (m, 1H), 2.18 (d, 7 = 14.4 Hz, 2H), 2.09-2.00 (m, 4H), 1.99-1.87 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.58 (m, 2H), 1.48-1.35 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C25H33N60+): calcd. m/z 433.26; found m/z 433.30. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000118_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
(m, 2H), 2.99-2.91 (m, 1H), 2.12- 1.91 (m, 8H), 1.88-1.69 (m, 6H), 1.62-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.41-1.24 (m, 5H), 1.13-1.04 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C28H41FN5CE): calcd. m/z 482.32; found m/z 483.35. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000119_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
J= 11.7 Hz, 1H), 2.89-2.53 (m, 2H), 2.06-1.83 (m, 9H), 1.80-1.71 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.44 (m, 6H), 1.37-1.23 (m, 5H), 0.93-0.80 (m, 1H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C26H37FN503S+): calcd. m/z 518.2; found m/z 518.2. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000120_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
2.91 (s, 3H), 2.14-1.97 (m, 6H), 1.87 (td, J= 15.2, 3.6 Hz, 2H), 1.68-1.54 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.31 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+ (C30H35N5CE): calcd. m/z 481.3; found m/z 482.3.
Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000121_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
Hz, 4H), 3.20 (t, j = 12.8 Hz, 2H), 3.08-2.96 (m, 2H), 2.91 (s, 3H), 2.15-1.97 (m, 6H), 1.96-1.82 (m, 2H), 1.63 (dt, J = 12.4, 6.3 Hz, 2H), 1.46-1.29 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C28H34N60+): calcd. m/z 483.3; found m/z 483.2. Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000122_0001
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
Figure imgf000123_0001
E. EXAMPLE 5
Figure imgf000123_0002
110 °C, overnight
72%
NaBH(OAc)3,
HCHO, DCM,
4M HCI in 1 ,4-dioxane HCI sonication
92
Figure imgf000123_0003
Figure imgf000123_0004
( trans)-4-( 6-( (4- fiuorophenvDamino )-3-( l -methylpiperidin-4-yl)pyridin-2- yl) amino) cyclohexan-l-ol
To a solution of 5-bromo-2,4-dichloropyridine (1.0 g, 4.4 mmol) and DIEA (0.85 g, 1.1 mL, 6.6 mmol) in anhydrous 2-propanol (10 mL) was slowly added trans-4- aminocyclohexan-l-ol (0.53 g, 4.6 mmol) in anhydrous 2-propanol (10 mL) at 0 °C. The resulting reaction mixture was heated at 120 °C for 24 h . Then solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc (50 mL), washed with water (3x) and brine, dried (Na2S04), and concentrated. The residue was purified with pre-packed silica gel disposable column to yield /ra//.s-4-((5-brorno-2-chloropyridin-4-yl)arnino)cyclohexan- l -ol (430 mg, 32 %) as a yellow solid.
To a solution of trans -4-((5-bromo-2-chloropyridin-4-yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (430 mg, 1.41 mmol) in EtOH (15 mL) and water (5.0 mL) was added tert- butyl 4-(4, 4,5,5- tetramethyl- 1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine- 1 (2//)-carboxylate (457 mg, 1.48 mmol) and Na2C03 (298 mg, 2.81 mmol) and Pd2(dba)3 (25.8 mg, 0.028.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen atmosphere at 90 °C for 8 h. Extraction with ethyl acetate for 3 times. The organic phase was combined and washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate. After removal of the solvent under reduced pressure, the residue was purified with pre-packed silica gel disposable column to yield tert-butyl 6-chl oro-4-(/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)-3',6'-dihydro-[3,4'-bipyridine]-r(277)-carboxylate (160 mg, 27.9 %) as a yellow solid.
To a solution of tert- butyl 6-chloro-4-((/ra//.s-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)arnino)-3l,6l- dihydro-[3,4'-bipyridine]-T(2'i )-carboxylate (160 mg, 392 pmol) in l,4-dioxane (15 mL) was added xantphos (22.7 mg, 0.039 mmol) , cesium carbonate (192 mg, 0.59 mmol) , 4- fluoroaniline (65.4 mg, 0.59 mmol) and Pd2(dba)3 (18.0 mg, 0.020 mmol) . The system was heated under nitrogen atmosphere at 110 °C overnight. Filtration and evaporation gave a residue which was purified by with pre-packed silica gel disposable column (0-30% methanol in dichloromethane) to yield tert- butyl 6-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)-3',6'-dihydro-[3,4'-bipyridine]-r(2'H)-carboxylate (137 mg, 72.4 %) as a yellow solid.
To a solution of tert-butyl 6-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-(((lr,4r)-4- hydroxycyclohexyl)amino)-3',6'-dihydro-[3,4'-bipyridine]-r(277)-carboxylate (137 mg, 0.284 mmol) in MeOH (50 mL) was added Pd/C (137 mg, 1.29 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere at room temperature for 24 h, then passed through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated under the reduced pressure. The residue was purified by by HPLC (0-100% MeCN in water + 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) to afford the desired compound tert- butyl 4-(6-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-4-((/ra//.s-4- hydroxycy cl ohexyl)amino)pyri din-3 -yl)piperi dine- l-carboxylate as a TFA salt, which was converted to the HC1 salt with the treatment of a 4 N HC1 solution in l,4-dioxane (0.50 mL, 1.8 mmol) followed by lyophilization (88 mg, 64 %) as a yellow solid.
To a solution of /ra//.s-4-((6-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-3-(piperidin-4-yl)pyridin-2- yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (30 mg, 0.078 mmol) in dichloromethane (1.0 mL) was added acetic acid (0.050 mL, 0.078 mmol), formaldehyde (19 mg, 17 pL, 0.23 mmol), and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (33 mg, 0.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was ultrasonicated for 15 min, quenched with MeOH, and filtrated. The filtrate was concentrated and the residue was purified by HPLC (0-100% MeCN in water + 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) to afford the desired compound as a TFA salt, which was converted to HC1 salt the treatment of a 4 N HC1 solution in l,4-dioxane followed by lyophilization to provided the desired compound irons A- ((6-((4-fluorophenyl)amino)-3-(l-methylpiperidin-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)amino)cyclohexan-l-ol (20 mg, 64 %) as yellow solid. ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) d 7.37-7.28 (m, 3H), 7.28-7.20 (m, 2H), 6.03 (s, 1H), 3.68-3.55 (m, 3H), 3.42-3.33 (m, 1H), 3.25-3.16 (m, 2H), 3.09-3.00 (m, 1H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 2.16-1.98 (m, 6H), 1.94-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.64-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.43-1.28 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C23H32FN40+): calcd. m/z 399.25; found m/z 399.20.
Table 3 shows compounds prepared following procedures identical or analogous to those described in Example 5. The requisite starting materials were commercially available, described in the literature, or readily synthesized by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Table 3 also illustrates the effects of the compounds on Mer tyrosine kinase.
NOTE: ++++ means < 10 nM; +++ means between 10-100 nM; ++ means between 100 nM-l pM; + means between 1-30 pM; - means inactive.
Table 3
Compound Structure Mer Physical Data
IC50 MS m/z (M+ 1 ) or/and Ή NMR
Figure imgf000126_0001
1.64-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.43-1.28 (m, 2H). MS (ESI) for [M+H]+(C23H32FN40+): calcd. m/z 399.25, found m/z 399.20
Many modifications and other embodiments of the subject matter described herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which the subject matter pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions. Therefore, it is to be understood that the subject matter described herein is not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the foregoing list of embodiments and appended claims. Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A compound of Formula I:
I
Figure imgf000127_0001
wherein,
Cy1 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl and C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
Rlais selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, Cl-
C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino,
Figure imgf000127_0002
Cy2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-
C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino,
Figure imgf000127_0003
Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy2, and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000127_0004
; wherein
Cy2 is as defined above; Cya is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
R2 is selected from hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, -C(0)R20, -C(0)N(R22)R2°, -N(R22)C(0)R2°, - S02N(R22)R21, -N(R22)S02R21, -S02R21, and -(CH2)nCy3; wherein
n is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R20 and R21 is each independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)qOR30, and -(CH2)qCy4; wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R30 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy4 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and (C1-C4 alkyl )NR40aR40b; wherein
R20 is as defined above;
R40a and R40b is each independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R22 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy3 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, , -C(0)R2°, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein
R20 is as defined above;
R3 is selected from -(CH2)pOH, -(CH2)PNHR23, and -NR23R24; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2; and
R23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R24 is -(CH2)qCy5;
wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4; Cy5 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, - NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; and
X is -NR50- or -(CH2)tNR50-; wherein
t is selected from 1 and 2; and
R50 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein Cy1 is optionally substituted C2-C7
heterocycloalkyl.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein said optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted piperidine.
4. The compound of claim 3, wherein said optionally substituted piperidine has the structure:
Figure imgf000129_0001
wherein the wavy lines denote points of attachment.
5. The compound of claim 1, wherein Rla is hydrogen.
6. The compound of claim 1, wherein Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl and Cy2.
7. The compound of claim 6, wherein Rlb is C1-C8 alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
8. The compound of claim 7, wherein Rlb is C3-C5 alkyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
9. The compound of claim 8, wherein Rlb is
Figure imgf000130_0001
10 The compound of claim 6, wherein Rlb is Cy2.
11. The compound of claim 10, wherein Cy2 is aryl.
12. The compound of claim 11, wherein said aryl is optionally substituted phenyl.
13. The compound of claim 12, wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with halogen
Figure imgf000130_0002
14. The compound of claim 13, wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is substituted
Figure imgf000130_0003
, wherein Cya is aryl or C3-C9 heteroaryl.
15. The compound of claim 13, wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with halogen.
16. The compound of claim 15, wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is:
Figure imgf000130_0004
17. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of - C(0)R20, -(CH2)nCy3, and -S02R21.
18. The compound of claim 17, wherein R2 is -(CH2)nCy3.
19. The compound of claim 18, wherein n is 1 and Cy3 is C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
20. The compound of claim 19, wherein said C3-C8 cycloalkyl is cyclopentyl.
21. The compound of claim 1, wherein R3 is -(CH2)pOH; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2.
22 The compound of claim 21, wherein p is 0.
23. The compound of claim 1, wherein X is -NH-.
24. The compound of claim 1, wherein the substituents on the carbons marked“a” and“b” are in a trans configuration.
25. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound has a structure:
Figure imgf000131_0001
wherein Rlb and R2 are defined as herein.
26. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000131_0002
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000133_0001
ı32
Figure imgf000134_0001
ı33
Figure imgf000135_0001

Figure imgf000136_0001
27. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is
Figure imgf000136_0002
28. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
29. A method for the treatment of a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase, the method comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of claim 1.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the disorder is a cancer, an infection, a fibrosis, a thrombotic disorder, a clotting disorder, or a disorder associated with an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the disorder is a cancer.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of breast cancer, cervical cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, colorectal cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer, pancreatic cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, glioma, leukemia, lymphoma, chronic myeloproliferative disorder, myelodysplastic syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasm, and plasma cell neoplasm (myeloma).
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the cancer is MerTK +/+.
34. The method of claim 32, wherein the cancer is MerTK -/-.
35. The method of claim 30, wherein the disorder is an infection.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the infection is viral.
37. The method of claim 35, wherein the infection is bacterial.
38. The method of claim 30, wherein the disorder is a fibrosis.
39. The method of claim 29, further comprising administering an additional active agent.
40. A method for inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of claim 1.
41. The method of claim 40, wherein the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
42. The method of claim 41, wherein the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for
treatment of a disorder related to Mer tyrosine kinase, prior to the administering step.
43. A compound of Formula II:
Figure imgf000137_0001
wherein,
Cy1 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl and C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; Rlais selected from hydrogen, deuterium, C1-C8 alkyl, and Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino,
Figure imgf000138_0001
Cy2 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-
C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino,
Figure imgf000138_0002
Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl, Cy2, and (C1-C4 alkyl)Cy2, and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and
Figure imgf000138_0003
; wherein
Cy2 is as defined above;
Cya is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C9 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, nitrile, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;
R2 is selected from hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, -C(0)R20, -C(0)N(R22)R2°, -N(R22)C(0)R2°, - S02N(R22)R21, -N(R22)S02R21, -S02R21, and -(CH2)nCy3; wherein
n is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R20 and R21 is each independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)qOR30, and -(CH2)qCy4; wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
R30 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy4 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and (C1-C4 alkyl )NR40aR40b; wherein R20 is as defined above;
R40a and R40b is each independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R22 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
Cy3 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3- C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, , -C(0)R2°, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino; wherein
R20 is as defined above;
R3 is selected from -(CH2)pOH, -(CH2)PNHR23, and -NR23R24; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2; and
R23 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
R24 is -(CH2)qCy5;
wherein
q is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4;
Cy5 is selected from C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and C3-C5 heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, - NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -C(0)-(Cl-C4 alkyl), C1-C4
hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino;and
X is -NR50- or -(CH2)tNR50-; wherein
t is selected from 1 and 2; and
R50 is selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
44. The compound of claim 43, wherein Cy1 is optionally substituted C2-C7
heterocycloalkyl.
45. The compound of claim 44, wherein said optionally substituted C2-C7 heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted piperidine.
46. The compound of claim 43, wherein Rla is hydrogen.
47. The compound of claim 43, wherein Rlb is selected from C1-C8 alkyl and Cy2.
48. The compound of claim 47, wherein Rlb is Cy2.
49. The compound of claim 48, wherein Cy2 is aryl.
50. The compound of claim 49, wherein said aryl is optionally substituted phenyl.
51. The compound of claim 50, wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is substituted with halogen.
52. The compound of claim 51, wherein said optionally substituted phenyl is:
Figure imgf000140_0001
53. The compound of claim 43, wherein R2 is hydrogen or C1-C4 alkyl.
54. The compound of claim 53, wherein said C1-C4 alkyl is methyl.
55. The compound of claim 43, wherein R3 is -(CH2)POH; wherein
p is selected from 0, 1, and 2.
56. The compound of claim 55, wherein p is 0.
57. The compound of claim 43, wherein X is -NH-.
58. The compound of claim 43, wherein the substituents on the carbons marked“a” and“b” are in a trans configuration.
59. The compound of claim 43, wherein the compound has a structure:
Figure imgf000140_0002
wherein Rlb and R2 are defined as herein.
60. The compound of claim 43, wherein the compound
Figure imgf000141_0001
Figure imgf000141_0002
61. The compound of claim 60, wherein the compound i
Figure imgf000141_0003
62. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 43, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
63. A method for the treatment of a disorder associated with Mer tyrosine kinase, the method comprising the step of administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of claim 43.
64. The method of claim 63, wherein the disorder is a cancer, an infection, a fibrosis, a thrombotic disorder, a clotting disorder, or a disorder associated with an immunosuppressed microenvironment surrounding diseased tissue.
65. The method of claim 64, wherein the disorder is a cancer.
66. The method of claim 65, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of breast cancer, cervical cancer, gastrointestinal cancer, colorectal cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, ovarian cancer, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer, pancreatic cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, glioma, leukemia, lymphoma, chronic myeloproliferative disorder, myelodysplastic syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasm, and plasma cell neoplasm (myeloma).
67. The method of claim 66, wherein the cancer is MerTK +/+.
68. The method of claim 66, wherein the cancer is MerTK -/-.
69. The method of claim 64, wherein the disorder is an infection.
70. The method of claim 69, wherein the infection is viral.
71. The method of claim 69, wherein the infection is bacterial.
72. The method of claim 64, wherein the disorder is a fibrosis.
73. The method of claim 63, further comprising administering an additional active agent.
74. A method for inhibiting Mer tyrosine kinase, in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of claim 43.
75. The method of claim 74, wherein the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
76. The method of claim 75, wherein the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for
treatment of a disorder related to Mer tyrosine kinase, prior to the administering step.
PCT/US2019/032722 2018-05-16 2019-05-16 Aminopyrimidines and aminopyridines as mertk inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment WO2019222538A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862672220P 2018-05-16 2018-05-16
US62/672,220 2018-05-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019222538A1 true WO2019222538A1 (en) 2019-11-21

Family

ID=68540798

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2019/032722 WO2019222538A1 (en) 2018-05-16 2019-05-16 Aminopyrimidines and aminopyridines as mertk inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019222538A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021097326A1 (en) * 2019-11-15 2021-05-20 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Aryl aminopyrimidines as dual mertk and tyro3 inhibitors and methods thereof
KR20220036856A (en) * 2020-09-15 2022-03-23 서울대학교기술지주 주식회사 Composition for treatment of circulating small extracellular vesicles-mediated cancer
WO2022059996A1 (en) * 2020-09-15 2022-03-24 서울대학교 기술지주 주식회사 Blood circulation micro in-vitro corpuscle-mediated cancer treatment composition
WO2022078305A1 (en) * 2020-10-12 2022-04-21 四川海思科制药有限公司 Heterocyclic derivative and medical application thereof
WO2023027517A1 (en) * 2021-08-27 2023-03-02 Yuhan Corporation 6-membered heteroaryl-containing aminopyridine compounds as egfr inhibitors
WO2023217156A1 (en) * 2022-05-09 2023-11-16 浙江同源康医药股份有限公司 Polycyclic compound and use thereof

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006035067A2 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-06 Tibotec Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Hiv inhibiting 5-heterocyclyl pyrimidines
WO2015061247A2 (en) * 2013-10-21 2015-04-30 Merck Patent Gmbh Heteroaryl compounds as btk inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2015196072A2 (en) * 2014-06-19 2015-12-23 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research Uses of kinase inhibitors for inducing and maintaining pluripotency
WO2016166546A1 (en) * 2015-04-16 2016-10-20 The University Of Durham An antimicrobial compound
WO2017059280A1 (en) * 2015-10-02 2017-04-06 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Novel pan-tam inhibitors and mer/axl dual inhibitors

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006035067A2 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-06 Tibotec Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Hiv inhibiting 5-heterocyclyl pyrimidines
WO2015061247A2 (en) * 2013-10-21 2015-04-30 Merck Patent Gmbh Heteroaryl compounds as btk inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2015196072A2 (en) * 2014-06-19 2015-12-23 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research Uses of kinase inhibitors for inducing and maintaining pluripotency
WO2016166546A1 (en) * 2015-04-16 2016-10-20 The University Of Durham An antimicrobial compound
WO2017059280A1 (en) * 2015-10-02 2017-04-06 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Novel pan-tam inhibitors and mer/axl dual inhibitors

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021097326A1 (en) * 2019-11-15 2021-05-20 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Aryl aminopyrimidines as dual mertk and tyro3 inhibitors and methods thereof
CN115023417A (en) * 2019-11-15 2022-09-06 北卡罗来纳大学教堂山分校 Arylaminopyrimidines as dual MERRTK and TYRO3 inhibitors and methods thereof
EP4058441A4 (en) * 2019-11-15 2023-12-20 The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Aryl aminopyrimidines as dual mertk and tyro3 inhibitors and methods thereof
KR20220036856A (en) * 2020-09-15 2022-03-23 서울대학교기술지주 주식회사 Composition for treatment of circulating small extracellular vesicles-mediated cancer
WO2022059996A1 (en) * 2020-09-15 2022-03-24 서울대학교 기술지주 주식회사 Blood circulation micro in-vitro corpuscle-mediated cancer treatment composition
KR102616469B1 (en) * 2020-09-15 2023-12-28 주식회사 유엔에스바이오 Composition for treatment of circulating small extracellular vesicles-mediated cancer
WO2022078305A1 (en) * 2020-10-12 2022-04-21 四川海思科制药有限公司 Heterocyclic derivative and medical application thereof
WO2023027517A1 (en) * 2021-08-27 2023-03-02 Yuhan Corporation 6-membered heteroaryl-containing aminopyridine compounds as egfr inhibitors
US11945798B2 (en) 2021-08-27 2024-04-02 Yuhan Corporation Substituted aminopyridine compounds as EGFR inhibitors
WO2023217156A1 (en) * 2022-05-09 2023-11-16 浙江同源康医药股份有限公司 Polycyclic compound and use thereof

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9555031B2 (en) Therapeutic uses of selected pyrrolopyrimidine compounds with anti-mer tyrosine kinase activity
WO2019222538A1 (en) Aminopyrimidines and aminopyridines as mertk inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment
US11529347B2 (en) SHP2 phosphatase inhibitors and methods of use thereof
EP3340983B1 (en) Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic compounds for treatment of immune and inflammatory disorders
KR102501558B1 (en) N-azaspirocycloalkane substituted n-heteroaryl compounds and compositions for inhibiting the activity of shp2
WO2018005533A1 (en) Antiproliferative pyrimidine-based compounds
TW202028173A (en) Prodrug modulators of the integrated stress pathway
WO2020198062A1 (en) Pharmaceutical compounds for the treatment of complement mediated disorders
KR20230049678A (en) Beneficial therapy for disorders mediated by Ikaros or Aiolos
US11001586B2 (en) Alkyl pyrrolopyrimidine analogs and methods of making and using same
AU2020381530A1 (en) Aryl aminopyrimidines as dual MerTK and Tyro3 inhibitors and methods thereof
WO2019222524A1 (en) Alkyl pyrrolopyrimidines as pan-tam inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment
WO2019222509A1 (en) Pyrazolopyrimidines as mertk inhibitors and their application in cancer treatment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19802713

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19802713

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1